Yamaha PSR-EW400 Handleiding

Categorie
Muziekinstrumenten
Type
Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

EN
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the
advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual
in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5–7.
Setting UpReferenceAppendix Quick Guide
DIGITAL KEYBOARD
Owners Manual
2
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).
DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other
than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically
recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone
could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting
cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended!
If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’
cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the
larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, con-
sult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-
pany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at
the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update
existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels
that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long
periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-
able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as
optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer
assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and
any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE
using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other
uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are
not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-
ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-
ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be
aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-
tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and
never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-
rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and
battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-
teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-
son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all
local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-
ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable
to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual
as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP (bottom)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : PSR-E453/PSR-EW400
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
3
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
For AC adaptor and PSR-E453/PSR-EW400
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-
able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-
tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does
not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-
tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,
6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be
found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit.
You should note this serial number in the space provided below and
retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid
identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
(bottom_en_01)
4
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and main-
tenance (servicing) instructions in the liter-
ature accompanying the product.
1 Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-
pod, bracket, or table specified by
the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-
vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-
aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has
been dropped.
(UL60065_03)
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
For AC adaptor
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.
(can_b_01)
(fcc_sengen_C)
5
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
For AC adaptor
WARNING
This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic
instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.
Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.
CAUTION
When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible.
If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the
power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor
from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet,
keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if
the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the
instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord
from the wall AC outlet.
For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or
even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These
precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the
cord, or place heavy objects on it.
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (page 72) only. Using the wrong adaptor
can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust
which may have accumulated on it.
This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open
the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal
components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp
or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases,
bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any
openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument,
turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the
AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha
service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Power supply/AC adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
DMI-5 1/3
6
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning
item may fall over and cause a fire.
Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in
explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage.
- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.
- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be
charged.
- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as
necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys.
- Use the specified battery type (page 72) only.
- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model,
and made by the same manufacturer.
- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the
+/- polarity markings.
- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used
for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument.
- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came
with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when
charging.
Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally
swallow them.
If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the
battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or
skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery
fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical
burns.
When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the
power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If
you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.)
Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to
you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but
are not limited to, the following:
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a
multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or
possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,
always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord
can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not
to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to
prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip
over them.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are
using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,
immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug
from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off,
electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level.
When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to
unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,
use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage
to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,
turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on
or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum
levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the
instrument to set the desired listening level.
Fire warning
Battery
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC adaptor
Location
Connections
DMI-5 2/3
7
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps
on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you
or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or
operational failure.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the
instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,
switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period
of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can
cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss
or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage
to the product, damage to data, or damage to
other property, follow the notices below.
Handling
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,
stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.
Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.
When you use the instrument along with an application on
your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you
set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to
avoid noise caused by communication.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or
vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct
sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to
the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified
operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the
instrument, since this might discolor the panel or
keyboard.
Maintenance
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use
paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Saving data
• Some of the data of this instrument (page 39) are retained
when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may
be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save
your important data onto USB flash drive/an external
device such as a computer (pages 36, 64). Before using a
USB flash drive, make sure to refer to page 62.
• To protect against data loss through USB flash drive
damage, we recommend that you save your important data
onto spare USB flash drive or an external device such as a
computer as backup data.
Information
About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data
including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is
strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which
Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha
has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright
laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to
distribute media in which these contents are saved or
recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to
those in the product.
* The contents described above include a computer
program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE
data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc.
* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your
performance or music production using these contents is
recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is
not required in such cases.
About functions/data bundled with the
instrument
Some of the preset songs and the songs that can be
downloaded from the Yamaha website have been edited for
length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as
the original.
About this manual
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual
are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft®
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The company names and product names in this manual are
the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
Handling caution
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
DMI-5 3/3
8
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide Reference AppendixSetting Up
Table of Contents
Special Features ..............................................................8
Compatible Format and Functions .................................10
Included Accessories .....................................................10
About the Manuals .........................................................11
Setting Up
Panel Controls and Terminals 12
Setting Up 14
Power Requirements......................................................14
Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................16
Adjusting the Master Volume .........................................16
Connecting Headphones or an External Device ............16
Using a Pedal (Sustain) .................................................17
Using a Keyboard Stand ................................................17
Quick Guide
Basic Operation and Display Items 18
Basic Operation..............................................................18
Display Items..................................................................19
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 20
Selecting a Main Voice...................................................20
Playing the “Grand Piano”..............................................20
Layering a Dual Voice ....................................................21
Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................21
Using the Metronome .....................................................22
Adding Harmony ............................................................23
Creating Arpeggios 24
Triggering Arpeggios ......................................................24
Changing the Arpeggio Type .........................................24
Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs 25
Assigning Functions to the Knobs ..................................25
Using the Knobs .............................................................25
Playing Styles 26
Using the Music Database .............................................26
Playing with Patterns Like a DJ! 27
Playing Songs 28
Listening to a Demo Song..............................................28
Selecting and Playing Back a Song ...............................28
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............29
Playing a Specified Section of a Song Repeatedly
(A-B Repeat) ..............................................................29
Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................29
Using the Song Lesson Feature 30
Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn ....................31
Recording Your Performance 32
Track Structure of a Song ..............................................32
Quick Recording ............................................................32
Recording to a Specified Track......................................33
Clearing a User Song.....................................................34
Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song................34
Memorizing Your Favorite Settings
(Registration Memory) 35
Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory
...35
Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory
..35
Connecting to Other Devices 36
Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in
Speakers....................................................................36
Connecting to a Computer .............................................36
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad .......................................37
Using the Melody Suppressor ........................................37
Using an External Stereo System for Playback
(OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400)...............38
Speaker Mute On/Off Setting (PSR-EW400) .................38
Backup and Initialization 39
Backup Parameters .......................................................39
Initializing the Instrument ...............................................39
Play a Variety of
Instrument Voices
Page 20
The instrument voice that sounds
when you play the keyboard can
be changed to violin, flute, harp, or
any of an extensive range of
voices.
Arpeggio Function
Page 24
Similar to the arpeggio functions
provided on some synthesizers,
this function automatically pro-
duces arpeggios (broken chords)
when you simply play the appro-
priate notes on the keyboard.
Play Audio via an
External Device
Page 36
By connecting an external audio
device such as an iPhone/iPad or
a device such as a computer, you
can play the audio sound of that
external device through this instru-
ment.
Special Features
9
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Quick GuideReferenceAppendix Setting Up
Reference
Handy Performance Features 40
Selecting a Reverb Type ................................................40
Selecting a Chorus Type ................................................40
Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................41
Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning ..........................................41
Pitch Controls—the [PITCH BEND] wheel .....................41
Calling Up Optimum Panel Settings—One Touch
Setting (OTS) .............................................................41
Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard ...........42
Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................42
Scale Tuning 43
Selecting a Scale ...........................................................43
Setting the Base Note for Each Scale ............................43
Tuning Each Note to Create an Original Scale ..............44
Voice Settings 45
Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................45
Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................45
Voice Editing ..................................................................45
Parameters Assigned to the Knobs 46
Adding DSP Effects........................................................48
Arpeggio Settings 49
Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Pattern
Playback—Arpeggio Quantize ...................................49
Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch ........49
Style and Pattern Settings 50
Style Variations—Sections.............................................50
Style Synchro Stop.........................................................51
Turning Each Style Track On/Off ...................................51
Pattern Variations—Sections .........................................52
Pattern Retrigger Function .............................................52
Changing the Tempo......................................................52
Tap Start ........................................................................52
Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Pattern .................53
Setting the Split Point.....................................................53
Playing Chords Without Style Playback
(Stop Accompaniment) ..............................................53
Chord Types for Style Playback.....................................54
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............55
Song Settings 56
BGM (Background Music) Playback ..............................56
Random Song Playback ................................................56
Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................57
Tap Start ........................................................................57
Song Volume .................................................................57
Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song ......................57
The Functions 58
Basic Procedure in the Function Display .......................58
USB Flash Drive Operations 62
Connecting a USB Flash Drive ......................................63
Formatting a USB Flash Drive .......................................64
Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive ........................64
Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive .......65
Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive ..................66
Loading a Style File .......................................................67
Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Drive ..................68
Deleting an SMF File in the USB Flash Drive ................68
Exiting from a File Control Display .................................69
Message List ..................................................................69
Appendix
Troubleshooting ............................................................. 70
Specifications................................................................. 71
Index .............................................................................. 73
Play Along with Styles
Page 26
The auto-accompaniment Styles
provide the equivalent of a full
backing band covering a wide vari-
ety of music genres. Select a
Style that matches the music you
want to play, or experiment with
new Styles to expand your musi-
cal horizons.
Create New Sounds
Page 25
By simply adjusting two knobs you
can enhance the sound of your
performance with dynamic effect
processing, such as adding distor-
tion or applying luscious reverb.
The functions that can be
assigned to the knobs include fil-
ter, DSP effect, etc.
Try playing like a DJ by
using the Patterns!
Page 27
The Pattern function lets you per-
form like a DJ. Use the Track Con-
trol to try out various instrument
combinations, and play with the
Knobs to create various new
sounds.
10
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Included Accessories
• Owner’s Manual (this book)
• Data List
• AC adaptor
*1
• Power cord (PSR-EW400)
• Music rest
• Online Member Product Registration
*2
*1:May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer.
*2:The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
Compatible Format and Functions
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compati-
ble music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of
manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM
System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone genera-
tion format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator.
However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original
data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a com-
puter with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the
power to the computer is on).
STYLE FILE FORMAT (SFF)
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion
system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord
types.
Insert the music rest
into the slots as
shown.
Attaching the Music Rest
11
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
About the Manuals
This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.
Included Documents
Owner’s Manual (this book)
• Setting Up Please read this section first.
• Quick Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions.
• Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of
the instrument.
• Appendix This section includes troubleshooting and specifications.
Data List
Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, Patterns and Effects.
Online Materials (PDF)
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI-related information for this instrument.
MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
Contains basic explanations about MIDI.
Computer-related Operations
Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transmit-
ting/receiving the data.
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc.
To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for searching the
desired files.
Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/
• The illustrations and displays as shown in this manual are based on the PSR-E453.
• Please note that the PSR-EW400 and PSR-E453 have different numbers of keys: the PSR-EW400 has 76 keys, and the PSR-E453 has
61 keys.
Downloading the Song Book/Song Data
Song Book (only in English, French, German, Spanish and Japanese)
Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument and
the optional Songs.
Song Data
Contains the data of 70 Songs that can be played back with this instrument and/or used for the
Song Lesson (page 30).
After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download the Song Book and the
Song Data free of charge.
Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/
You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this
manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.
NOTE
• The downloaded Song data can be played back by transferring data from the computer to the instrument or saving data to
the USB flash drive (page 28).
NOTE
12
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Panel Controls and Terminals
Front Panel
Setting Up
Voice List (Data List)
Style List (Data List)
Song List (Data List)
Pattern List (Data List)
Dial (page 18)
Display (page 19)
As illustrated, each note of the key-
board has a specific note number
and name (e.g., 036/C1), which is
used in making various settings,
such as Split Point (page 53).
PSR-E453: 036 (C1) – 096 (C6)
PSR-EW400: 028 (E0) – 103 (G6)
The illustration is of the PSR-E453.
13
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
Setting Up
q [ ] (Standby/On) switch ....................Page 16
w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................Page 16
e [PORTABLE GRAND] button...............Page 20
r [DEMO] button......................................Page 28
t [TRANSPOSE] button ..........................Page 41
y [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........Page 37
u [LESSON] button..................................Page 30
i [REC] button .........................................Page 32
o [METRONOME] button.........................Page 22
!0 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................Page 52
!1 VOICE CONTROL section
[SPLIT] button...................................Page 21
[DUAL] button ...................................Page 21
[HARMONY] button ..........................Page 23
[ARPEGGIO] button..........................Page 24
!2 LIVE CONTROL section
[ASSIGN] button ...............................Page 25
[A] and [B] knobs .............................Page 25
[DSP] button......................................Page 48
!3 CATEGORY buttons .............................Page 18
!4 [FUNCTION] button..............................Page 58
!5 [MUSIC DATABASE] button.................Page 26
!6 Number buttons [1]–[9], [-/NO],
[0/EXECUTE] and [+/YES] buttons .....Page 18
!7 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons
[BANK/MEMORY] buttons................Page 35
[1]–[4] buttons...................................Page 35
!8 [PATTERN] button ................................Page 27
!9 [SONG] button......................................Page 28
@0 [STYLE] button .....................................Page 26
@1 [VOICE] button .....................................Page 20
@2 PATTERN/SONG/STYLE Control buttons
•When the [PATTERN] lamp is on:
................................Pages 27 and 52
•When the [SONG] lamp is on:
..............................................Page 29
•When the [STYLE] lamp is on:
.........................Pages 26, 50, and 51
@3 TR
ACK CONTROL buttons
•When the [PATTERN] lamp is on:
..............................................Page 27
•When the [SONG] lamp is on:
......................................Pages 29, 32
•When the [STYLE] lamp is on:
..............................................Page 51
@4 [PITCH BEND] wheel ...........................Page 41
@5 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit....Page 20
These indicate the drum or percussion instrument assigned to
the corresponding keys (in the case of “Standard Kit 1,” shown
in the Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List).
Rear Panel
@6 OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks (PSR-EW400)
..............................................Page 38
@7 [SUSTAIN] jack .....................................Page 17
@8 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack (PSR-E453),
[PHONES] jack (PSR-EW400) .............Page 16
@9 [AUX IN] jack ........................................Page 36
#0 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal .................Page 62
[USB TO HOST] terminal .....................Page 36
#1 DC IN jack.............................................Page 14
@7@6 @8 @9
#0 #1
@7 @8 @9
#0 #1
PSR-EW400
PSR-E453
14
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Setting Up
Power Requirements
Although the instrument will run either from an AC
adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an
AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is
more environmentally friendly than batteries and
does not deplete resources.
Using an AC Adaptor
Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the
illustration.
Using Batteries
This instrument requires the following batteries.
PSR-E453: Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese
(R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.
PSR-EW400: Six “D” size alkaline (LR20), manga-
nese (R20) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.
The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batter-
ies are recommended for this instrument, since other
types may result in poorer battery performance.
1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off.
2 Open the battery compartment cover located on
the instrument’s bottom panel.
• You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash
drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable
enough to last through these crucial operations.
• Use the specified AC adaptor (page 72) only. Using the
wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument
or overheating.
• When using the AC adaptor with a removable plug, make
sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the
plug alone can cause electric shock or fire.
• Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug.
To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be
careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and
plug.
NOTICE
AC outlet
AC
adaptor
2
1
DC IN jack
(page 13)
PSR-EW400
PSR-E453
DC IN jack
(page 13)
AC Outlet
Power cord
AC
adaptor
2
1
3
The shape of the plug differs
depending on your area.
WARNING
WARNING
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet
you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or mal-
function occurs, immediately turn the power off and dis-
connect the plug from the outlet.
• Follow this procedure in reverse order when disconnecting
the AC adaptor.
• When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that
came with the batteries.
Slide the plug as
indicated.
Plug
The shape of the plug differs
depending on your area.
CAUTION
NOTE
NOTICE
PSR-E453
15
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Setting Up
3 Insert the six new batteries, putting them in the
correct direction according to the illustration.
4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that
it locks firmly in place.
Setting the battery type
Depending on the battery type to be used, you may
need to change the battery type setting on this instru-
ment. To change the setting, first turn on the power to
the instrument, then choose the battery type you
would like to use. Alkaline (and manganese) batteries
are chosen by default. For details, refer to page 61,
Function 068 (PSR-E453)/Function 069 (PSR-
EW400).
Checking the power status
You can confirm the power source at the left corner of
the display.
: The power is supplied from the AC adaptor.
: The power is supplied from the batteries.
Remaining battery power indication
Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batteries
installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data
being recorded or transferred at the time.
• Make sure to set the battery type correctly (page 15).
When battery power becomes too low for proper operation,
the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted,
and other problems may occur. When this happens, make
sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already-
recharged ones.
PSR-EW400
PSR-EW400
PSR-E453
NOTICE
• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the
specified charger device when charging.
• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an
AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the
instrument.
• Failure to set the battery type may shorten the amount of
the battery life. Make sure to set the battery type correctly.
• When the AC adaptor is plugged in to the AC outlet, the bat-
tery icon does not appear even when batteries are inserted. In
this case, the power is supplied from the AC adaptor.
Indicates that the power will be turned off immedi-
ately. When rechargeable batteries are used, this
icon flashes before the power is turned off.
Indicates that remaining power is insufficient for
operation. Before the power runs out, replace all
the batteries with new ones, or fully recharged
ones (when using rechargeable types). Note that
the instrument may not work properly, including
unusually soft volume and poor sound quality
when remaining power becomes low.
Indicates that the remaining power is sufficient.
NOTE
NOTICE
Only one of these is shown.
GrandPno
NOTE
16
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Setting Up
Turning the Power On/Off
1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] control to
“MIN”.
2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the
power on.
Adjust the volume as desired while playing the
keyboard.
3 Press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for
about a second to turn the power off.
Setting the Auto Power Off function
To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this
instrument features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the instrument is
not operated for a specified period of time. The
amount of time that elapses before the power is auto-
matically turned off is 30 minutes by default; however,
you can change the setting. For details, refer to page
61, Function 067 (PSR-E453)/Function 068 (PSR-
EW400).
Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method)
Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key
on the keyboard. Then the instrument starts up with
the Auto Power Off function disabled.
Adjusting the Master Volume
To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound,
use the [MASTER VOLUME] control while playing
the keyboard.
Connecting Headphones or an
External Device
Connecting Headphones
Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES/
OUTPUT]/[PHONES] jack on the rear panel.
The built-in speakers are automatically shut off when
a plug is inserted into this jack.
Connecting an External Device
PSR-E453: This jack also functions as an external
output. By connecting to a computer, keyboard
amplifier, recorder, or other audio device, you can
• Even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is
still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug
the AC adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
• Press only the [ ] (Standby/On) switch when turning the
power on. Any other operations such as pressing keys,
buttons or the pedal are not allowed. Doing so may cause
the instrument to malfunction.
12
CAUTION
NOTICE
PSR-EW400
PSR-E453
The lowest key
• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period
of time while connected to an external device such as an
amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the
instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to
the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-
tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the
power to turn off automatically when a device is con-
nected, disable Auto Power Off.
• Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the
power is turned off. For details, see page 39.
• Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause
permanent hearing loss.
NOTICE
NOTE
CAUTION
Standard stereo
phone plug
17
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Setting Up
output the audio signal of this instrument to that
external device. The speakers of this instrument
are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted
into this jack.
PSR-EW400: When connecting an external
speaker, refer to page 38.
Using a Pedal (Sustain)
You can produce a natural sustain as you play by
pressing a footswitch (FC5 or FC4A; sold separately)
plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack.
Using a Keyboard Stand
The following keyboard stands (sold separately) can
be used.
PSR-E453: L-2C
PSR-EW400: L-6
When using L-6 Keyboard Stand
(PSR-EW400)
The exterior size of PSR-EW400 is beyond the limits
as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. How-
ever, we have determined through tests that the
stand can be safely used for the instrument. When
setting the instrument, place it on the center of the
stand as shown in the illustration.
• Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause
permanent hearing loss.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-
ponents, turn off the power of all the components. Also,
before turning any components on or off, make sure to set
all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the
components or electrical shock may occur.
• To avoid possible damage to the external device, first turn
on the power to the instrument, then to the external device.
When turning off the power, do so in reverse order: first
turn off the power to the external device, then to the instru-
ment.
• Plug or unplug the footswitch while the power is off. Also, do
not press the footswitch when turning the power on. Doing so
changes the polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed
operation.
• The sustain function does not affect Split Voices (page 21).
• Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay
after the notes have been released while the footswitch is
held.
CAUTION
NOTICE
NOTE
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where
it might accidentally slip down. This could cause physical
injury to you or others, as well as damage to the instru-
ment or other property.
Place the instrument so
that the left and right
parts of the stand are
inside the protrusions on
the bottom panel of the
instrument.
Make sure that the bottom of
the instrument firmly rests on
the stoppers.
CAUTION
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
18
Quick Guide
Basic Operation and Display Items
Basic Operation
This instrument features four basic functions: Voice, Style, Pattern and Song. To use this instrument, select a
basic function first, and then make various settings.
Press
briefly to
increase.
3 Start a function or play
the keyboard.
2 Select an item
or value.
1 Select a basic
function.
Rotate the dial clockwise to
increase the value of the
selected item, or counter-
clockwise to decrease it’s
value.
Dial
Increase
When selecting a Voice, Style,
Pattern, Song, etc., you can use
these buttons to jump to the first
item in the next or previous cate-
gory.
These buttons can also be used
to select function items sequen-
tially after pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button.
CATEGORY [+], [-] buttons
Use these buttons to directly
enter the desired Style/Voice
number etc, or a parameter
value.
Example:
Selecting Voice 003,
Bright Piano.
Number buttons [0]–[9]
Press the [+/YES] button briefly
to increase the value by 1, or
press the [-/NO] button briefly to
decrease the value by 1. Press
and hold either button to continu-
ously increase or decrease the
value in the corresponding direc-
tion.
Pressing both buttons simultane-
ously lets you reset a parameter
to the default value.
[+/YES], [-/NO] buttons
Decrease
Press
briefly to
decrease.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
Buttons having this indication can be
used to call up an alternate function when
the relevant button is pressed and held.
Hold down this button until the function calls
up.
Depending on the basic function selected in step 1, you can use
the different functions as printed on the panel. Song functions are
printed above the buttons, Pattern functions are printed further
above, and Style functions are printed below.
Jumps to
the first
item in the
previous
category.
Jumps to
the first
item in
the next
category.
In most procedures described throughout this
manual, the dial is used for selecting items or
changing values. Note however, that in most
cases in which the dial can be used to
change values, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] but-
tons can also be used.
Press number
buttons [0], [0],
[3].
Quick Guide
Basic Operation and Display Items
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
19
Quick Guide
Display Items
The display shows all the current settings of the Song, Style Pattern, Voice and other related functions.
GrandPno
001
001
This area indicates the on/off status of
each function. Each indication is
shown when the corresponding func-
tion is turned on.
page 21
page 21
page 23
page 24
page 48
page 43
page 42
page 26
page 51
On/off status
Normally this indicates the notes you play. When
the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates
the current notes and chord of playback. When
the Dictionary function is used, this indicates the
notes of the chord you specify.
Notation
• Any notes occurring below or above the staff are
indicated by “8va.
• For a few specific chords, not all notes may be
shown, due to space limitations in the display.
NOTE
Indicates the source from which this
instrument obtains power, AC adaptor or
batteries (page 15).
Appears when USB flash drive is con-
nected to this instrument (page 63).
Power source status
USB connection status
Indicates the current beat of playback (page 28).
Indicates the parameters currently assigned to the
knobs (page 25).
Indicates the Function number when the [FUNC-
TION] button is pressed, or the current Measure
number during playback of a Song, Style or Pattern.
Indicates the chord which is being played in the Auto
Accompaniment range (page 26) or specified via
Song playback.
Indicates the on/off status of the current
Song, Style or Pattern (pages 27, 29, 32,
51).
Beat
Knob assignment
FUNCTION and MEASURE
Chord
Track status
001
The illustration is of the PSR-E453.
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
20
Quick Guide
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
This instrument features various instrumental Voices including piano. Not only can you
play just one single Voice (Main Voice), but you can also layer a different Voice (Dual
Voice) to the Main Voice, or play a different Voice (Split Voice) in the left-hand area of
the keyboard from the right-hand area.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The Voice number and name will be shown.
For a list of available Voices, refer to the Voice
List in the separate Data List.
2
Use the dial to select the desired Voice.
3
Play the keyboard.
Preset Voice Types
When you want to reset various settings to default
and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTA-
BLE GRAND] button.
The Voice for the entire keyboard will be set to 001
“Grand Piano” (PSR-E453)/ or “Live! Grand Piano”
(PSR-EW400).
Selecting a Main Voice
• Voice number 001 on the PSR-EW400 is “Live! Grand
Piano.
001–237 Instrument Voices.
238–261
(Drum/SFX Kit)
Various drum/percussion or SFX sounds are
assigned to individual keys. Details on assign-
ing instruments to keys are provided in the
Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List.
262–301 Used for Arpeggio performance (page 24).
302–758 XGlite Voices.
000
Selecting this automatically calls up the most
suitable Voice and panel setups for the cur-
rent Style, Song or Pattern. This function is
called OTS (page 41).
GrandPno
001
Appears when the
[VOICE] button is on.
Voice name
Voice number
NOTE
Flute
137
Playing the “Grand Piano”
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
21
Quick Guide
In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different
Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.
1
Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.
2
Press the [DUAL] button again to exit
from Dual.
Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice
suitable for the current Main Voice, you can also
select a different Dual Voice (page 45).
By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,
you can play a different Voice between the Left hand
and Right hand areas.
1
Press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split on.
The keyboard is divided into left and right hand
area at the Split Point. You can play a Split Voice
on the left hand area while playing a Main Voice
and Dual Voice on the right hand area of the key-
board.
The Split Voice (page 45) and the Split Point can
be changed as desired (page 53).
2
Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit
from Split.
Layering a Dual Voice
Two Voices will
sound at the same
time.
Appears when
Dual is on
Playing a Split Voice in the Left
Hand area
Appears when
Split is on
Split Voice
Main Voice (and Dual Voice)
Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2)
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
22
Quick Guide
This instrument features a built-in metronome which
can be used when practicing.
1
Press the [METRONOME] button to start
the metronome.
2
Press the [METRONOME] button again
to stop the metronome.
Adjusting the Metronome Tempo
This operation lets you adjust not only the metro-
nome tempo, but also the tempo of Style, Song and
Pattern.
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up
“Tempo.
The current tempo is shown on the display.
2
Adjust the tempo by rotating the dial.
Setting the Time Signature
Here, we’ll set a time signature of 6/8 as an example.
1
Hold down the [METRONOME] button
for longer than a second to call up
“TimeSigN” (Time Signature Numera-
tor).
The number of beats per measure is shown on
the display.
2
Rotate the dial to select the number of
beats per measure.
A chime will sound on the first beat of each mea-
sure while a click sounds the other beats. If “0” is
selected, a click sounds for all beats with no
chime accent. Select 6 for this example.
3
Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to
call up “TimeSigD” (Time Signature
Denominator).
The length of one beat is shown on the display.
4
Rotate the dial to select the length of
one beat, from 2
nd
, 4
th
, 8
th
and 16
th
note.
Select “08” (8
th
note) for this example.
5
Confirm the setting by playing the Met-
ronome.
Setting the Metronome Volume
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “MtrVol” (Function 061).
3
Rotate the dial to set the volume.
Using the Metronome
Tempo
090
Current tempo
TimeSigN
06
Hold for longer
than a second.
Number of beats
per measure.
• This parameter cannot be set during playback of a Style,
Song or Pattern.
NOTE
TimeSigD
08
The length of
one beat.
MtrVol
100
061
Metronome volume
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
23
Quick Guide
You can add effects such as Harmony, Tremolo and
Echo to the Main Voice. For a list of the effects, refer
to the Harmony Type List in the separate Data List.
1
Press the [HARMONY] button to turn
Harmony on.
Although turning on the Harmony will select a
Harmony type suitable for the current Main Voice,
you can select a different Harmony type as
described in the following steps.
2
Hold down the [HARMONY] button for
longer than a second until “HarmType”
(Function 042) appears on the display.
After a few seconds, the current Harmony type
appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select the desired Har-
mony type.
The operation differs depending on the Harmony
type. Try playing the keyboard by referring to
“How to sound each Harmony Type” at right, and
the Harmony Type List.
4
Press the [HARMONY] button again to
turn Harmony off.
Adjusting the Harmony Volume
You can adjust the Harmony volume in the Function
Settings (page 60, Function 043).
Adding Harmony
Appears when the
Harmony is on.
HarmType
042
Trio
02
042
Current Harmony type
Hold for longer
than a second.
Playing each Harmony Type
• Harmony type 01 to 05
Press the right-hand keys while playing
chords in the Auto Accompaniment area
of the keyboard when ACMP is on (page
26).
• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)
Hold down two keys.
• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)
Keep holding
down the keys.
• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)
Play the keys.
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
24
Quick Guide
Creating Arpeggios
The Arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing
the notes of the chord. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third,
and fifth—to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music production
as well as performance.
1
Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn on
the Arpeggio function.
2
Press a note or notes to trigger Arpeg-
gio.
The Arpeggio phrase differs depending on the
number of pressed notes and the area of the key-
board.
When Split (page 21) is on, Arpeggio is applied
only to the Split Voice. When Split is off, Arpeggio
is applied to the Main and Dual Voices. Arpeggio
cannot be applied to the Split and Main/Dual
Voices simultaneously.
3
To turn off the Arpeggio function, press
the [ARPEGGIO] button again.
The most suitable Arpeggio type is automatically
selected when you select a Main Voice, but you can
also select any other Arpeggio type. For a list of
available Arpeggios, refer to the Arpeggio List in the
separate Data List.
1
Hold down the [ARPEGGIO] button for
longer than a second to call up “ARP
Type” (Function 044).
After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio type
appears.
2
Rotate the dial to select the desired
Arpeggio type.
Triggering Arpeggios
• Selecting a Voice number between 262 and 301 will turn
on Arpeggio automatically.
• Selecting a Voice number between 292 and 301 will turn
on Split automatically, as well as Arpeggio. When one of
those Voices is selected, Arpeggio is applied only to the
Split Voice and is triggered only by playing a key to the
left of the Split Point.
• By assigning the Arpeggio Hold function to the foot-
switch, the Arpeggio will continue to play after the note is
released (page 49).
Appears when the
Arpeggio is on.
NOTE
NOTE
Changing the Arpeggio Type
• When playing one of the Arpeggio types 117 to 150,
select a Drum Kit (Voice No.238–261) as the Main Voice.
SynArp1
004
044
Current Arpeggio type
ARP Type
044
Hold for longer
than a second.
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
25
Quick Guide
Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs
The two knobs can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming
the sound in a variety of musical ways. Select the desired pre-programmed function
combination printed above the knobs, then rotate the knobs, to enjoy the sound.
Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequen-
tially assign the function combinations provided: (1)
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) … etc. The cur-
rent combination is shown in the display.
The target differs depending on the selected number.
For details about each function, refer to page 46.
Here is an example of how to use the knobs. For
some other ideas for using the knobs, refer to page
47.
1
Select the desired Main Voice (page 20).
Here, select “Voice No.156 SquareLd” (Square
Lead) as a synth-lead type Voice.
2
Press the [ASSIGN] button several times
until z appears in the display.
3
Rotate knob B all the way to the right
(maximum), then play the keyboard with
your right hand while operating the
knob A with your left.
Assigning Functions to the
Knobs
Function Target
1
Filter
(Cutoff, Resonance)
Main Voice and Dual Voice2
Effect
(Reverb, Chorus)
3
EG
(Attack, Release)
4
Style Filter
(Cutoff, Resonance)
Style (page 26) or Pattern (page 27)
5
Volume Balance/
Pattern Retrigger
Knob A: Audio input from the external
device, and Style/Pattern/
Song
Knob B: Pattern
6DSP
The DSP part selected in the Func-
tion Settings (page 60, Function 041).
• Only selecting a function combination will not affect the sound
even if the knob arrow is not at the center position. The
selected function only works when the knob is moved.
GrandPno
001
Current function
NOTE
Using the Knobs
• After selecting 1, 2 or 3 by pressing the [ASSIGN] but-
ton, changing the Voice will replace the settings cre-
ated via the knobs with the default settings of the new
Voice .
If you want to keep the settings you have created,
make sure to memorize it to Registration Memory
(page 35) before selecting a different Voice.
• Rotating a knob to the right while the volume is set to a
high level may result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce
the volume level.
Filter
Cutoff
Filter
Resonance
NOTICE
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
26
Quick Guide
Playing Styles
This instrument includes an Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate
“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety
of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.
1
Press the [STYLE] button, then use the
dial to select the desired Style.
For the Style List, refer to the separate Data List.
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn
on the Auto Accompaniment (ACMP).
With this operation, the area of the keyboard to
the left of the Split Point becomes the “Auto
Accompaniment area” and is used only for speci-
fying the chords. The rhythm part as well as the
bass and chord accompaniment play back when
you play chords.
The Split Point can be changed as desired (page
53).
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
Synchro Start on.
This puts the Style playback in “standby” and
Style starts playing back when you play the key-
board.
4
Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-
ment area to start playback.
Play a melody with the right hand and chords with
the left hand.
5
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
playback.
You can easily add variations to your perfor-
mance by changing the section of the Style. For
details, refer to page 50.
With this function, you can easily call up suitable
panel settings such as Voice and Style simply by
selecting your desired music genre.
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
Both the ACMP and Synchro Start are automati-
cally turned on.
2
Rotate the dial to select the desired
Music Database.
This operation calls up panel settings, such as for
Voice and Style, that are registered to the
selected Music Database. For the Music Data-
base List, refer to the separate Data List.
3
Play the keyboard as described in steps
4–5 of the previous section.
BritRock
001
Appears when Style
mode is active.
Style Name
Style Number
Appears when the Auto
Accompaniment is on.
Auto Accompaniment
area
Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2)
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
EuTrance
057
Flashes when
sync start is on.
• For information about how to play chords, refer to pages
54 and 55.
Using the Music Database
Split Point
NOTE
Jude Hey
001
Music Database
number
Appears when Music
Database is in use.
Music Database name
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
27
Quick Guide
Playing with Patterns Like a DJ!
The Pattern playback function lets you repeatedly play various rhythm patterns, and is
particularly effective in dance music styles, such as Hip Hop, House, etc. Try out the
cool DJ-like performance features—changing keys in the left-hand area of the keyboard
and rotating the knobs for dynamic sound variations.
1
Press the [PATTERN] button, then use
the dial to select the desired Pattern.
ACMP is automatically turned on, and the key-
board is divided into the Auto Accompaniment
area (page 26) and melody area.
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to start
Pattern playback.
You can also start playback by pressing any note
in the Auto Accompaniment area.
During Pattern playback, enjoy creating sound
variations via the following operations.
Turning on/off individual tracks via the
[TRACK CONTROL] buttons
Changing the Section via the [A]–[E]
buttons
Using the Retrigger function
Pattern Retrigger is a function which repeats
the first part of the current Pattern, for a rhyth-
mic break effect. For details, refer to page 52.
Transposing playback by pressing any
note in the Auto Accompaniment area.
Changing the sound via the Knobs
Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to
select “4 STYLE CUTOFF/STYLE RESO-
NANCE” then rotate the knobs A and B.
Playing Arpeggios in the right-hand
area
Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn it on,
then press the notes in the right-hand area of
the keyboard.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
playback.
• Up to two track buttons can be pressed simultane-
ously for turning on or off.
ChartDnc
001
Flashes
On/off status is shown in
the display (page 19)
NOTE
SECT B
• When you select a Voice between 292 and 301,
Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice. Playing a
key to the left of the Split Point turns Arpeggio on as
well as specifies the key for Pattern playback.
SECT B
Split Point
Specified key
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
28
Quick Guide
Playing Songs
You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of
the functions, such as Lesson.
Song Category
The Songs are organized by category as listed below.
Press the [DEMO] button to play Demo Songs 001–
003 in sequence. Playback will repeat continuously,
starting again from the first Song (001).
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] or [ ] (Start/
Stop) button.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then rotate the
dial to select the desired Song.
For a list of available Songs, refer to the Song List
in the separate Data List.
You can select User Songs, Songs transferred
from a computer, and Songs in the USB flash
drive in the same way as above.
2
Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button to
start playback.
To stop playback, press the [ ] (Start/Stop)
button again.
• In addition to the 30 preset Songs in this instrument, you can enjoy extra Songs downloadable from the Yamaha website. For details,
refer to page 11.
• For instructions on transferring Songs from a computer to this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related
Operations.
The numbers are generally assigned to the Songs in the following sequence: Songs transferred from a computer, Songs in the USB
flash drive. When you transfer a Song from a computer while the USB flash drive is connected to the instrument, the transferred Song
will be inserted before the first USB Song number, moving all USB Song numbers later in sequence.
Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument.
Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument.
These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for the Song Lesson.
These piano ensemble pieces are also well suited for the Song Lesson.
These songs are ideal for when you want to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns.
Songs you record yourself (page 32).
FLASH MEMORY: Songs transferred from a computer (page 36).
USB: Songs in the USB flash drive (page 62).
NOTE
Listening to a Demo Song
Selecting and Playing Back a
Song
• External MIDI Songs containing the Portamento Control
and Scale Tune settings may not be played correctly.
• If playback of a Song in the USB flash drive or a Song
transferred from a computer produces the distorted
sound, decrease the Song volume (page 57) to reduce
the distortion, and then adjust the master volume (page
16).
Jeanie
013
Appears when in the
Style mode.
Song name
Song number
Each arrow mark flashes in
time with the beat.
Jeanie
013
001
Current measure
NOTE
NOTE
Playing Songs
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
29
Quick Guide
You can play back only a specific section of a Song
repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B
point (end point) in one-measure increments.
1
Start playback of the Song (page 28).
2
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the start point, press
the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button to set
the A point.
3
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the end point, press
the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again to
set the B point.
The specified A-B section of the Song will now
play repeatedly.
4
To cancel repeat playback, press the
[ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again.
To stop playback, press the [ ] (Start/Stop)
button.
Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—melody,
percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the tracks
can be muted so that you can play the muted part
yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly
will toggle the on/off status.
Song Fast Forward, Fast
Reverse, and Pause
• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast
Forward will only work within the range between A and B.
• The [ ], [ ] and [ ] buttons cannot be used for Demo
Song playback started by using the [DEMO] button.
Playing a Specified Section of a
Song Repeatedly (A-B Repeat)
[] Fast Reverse
During playback,
press this button to
rapidly return to an
earlier point in the
Song.
[] Fast Forward
During playback, press this
button to rapidly skip ahead
to a later point in the Song.
[] Pause
During playback,
press this button to
pause playback, and
press again to start
from that point.
NOTE
AB
• If you want to set start point “A” to the top of the Song,
press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting
playback.
• If you want to set end point “B” to the end of the Song,
specify only the A point and play back the Song to the
end.
Turning Each Track On/Off
• Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for
turning on or off.
NOTE
Track number off—Track is
muted or contains no data
Track number on—Track will
be played back
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
30
Quick Guide
Using the Song Lesson Feature
You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try
practicing with these three Song Lesson types while referring to the music scores in
the Song Book downloaded from the website (page 11).
Lesson Types
Lesson 1 (LISTEN): You do not need to play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the selected part
will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it as best as you can.
Lesson 2 (TIMING): Simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play
wrong notes, the correct notes will sound.
Lesson 3 (WAITING): Try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play
the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing.
1
Select the desired Song for your lesson
(page 28).
2
Turn off the part you want to practice.
For the right-hand lesson, press the [1/RIGHT]
button to turn off the right-hand part. For the left-
hand lesson, press the [2/LEFT] button to turn off
the left-hand part. For lessons using both hands,
turn off both parts.
Pressing one of the TRACK CONTROL buttons
repeatedly will toggle the on/off status of each
part, which can be shown on the display.
3
Press the [LESSON] button to start play-
back of the Song.
Pressing the [LESSON] button repeatedly will
change the lesson number from 1: LISTEN 2:
TIMING 3: WAITING off 1…. Press this
button until the desired number is shown on the
display.
To stop the lesson, press the [ ] (Start/Stop)
button.
Even during playback, you can change the lesson
number by pressing the [LESSON] button.
4
When Song playback reaches to the
end, check your evaluation Grade on the
display.
In lesson 2 (TIMING) and 3 (WAITING), when the
Song reaches to the end, your performance will
be evaluated in four levels: “Excellent!, “Very
Good!”, “Good”, “OK”. “Excellent!” is the highest
evaluation.
After the evaluation display is shown, the lesson
will start again from the beginning.
• If you want to maintain a steady playback tempo during Lesson 3, change the parameter in the Function Settings (page 61, Function
064).
NOTE
• The Song Lesson can be applied to Songs transferred
from a computer, and Songs in USB flash drive. How-
ever, some of the Lesson functions may not be applied
to some Songs due to the structure of the Song data.
• The Song Lesson cannot be applied to the User Songs
and the Songs other than SMF format 0.
NOTE
ForElise
015
Track 1 is unlit
Track 2 is unlit
Track 1 and 2
are unlit
Right-hand
lesson
Left-hand
lesson
Both-hands
lesson
TIMING
Lp2
007
The notation and
key positions you
should play are
shown.
In lesson 2, both-hands les-
son is indicated as “LR2,
right-hand lesson is indi-
cated as “R2” and left-hand
lesson is indicated as “L2.
~~~~~~~~ Excellent!
~~~~~~ Very Good!
~~~~ Good
~~ OK
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
31
Quick Guide
If you want to practice a specific section in which you
made a mistake or you have difficulty with, use the
Repeat & Learn function.
Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button
during a lesson.
The Song position will move back four measures, a
one-measure count will play, then Song playback will
start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat
with a one-measure count-in.
To exit from this status, press this button again.
Making Practice Perfect—
Repeat & Learn
• You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn
function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] dur-
ing repeat playback.
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
32
Quick Guide
Recording Your Performance
You can record up to 10 of your performances to the instrument as User Songs. The
recorded User Songs can be played back in the same way as the preset Songs.
A Song can be recorded to the six tracks. You can
record without specifying tracks, but you can also
record each track one by one (e.g., only the right-
hand part or the left-hand part) to create a complete
piece which may be difficult to play at once.
Melody Tracks [1/RIGHT]–[5]
The melody performance will be recorded.
Accompaniment Track [A]
The chord progression (for the Style) or the key
change (for the Pattern) will be recorded.
This section explains how to record without specify-
ing a track. This is useful when you record a new
Song from scratch.
1
Make the desired settings including the
Main Voice selection.
2
Make the desired settings of your perfor-
mance.
If you want to record only the melody performance, press
the [SONG] button.
If you want to record the performance using a Style, press
the [STYLE] button.
If you want to record the performance using a Pattern,
press the [PATTERN] button.
3
Press the [REC] button to enter the
Record Ready mode.
This operation selects the lowest-numbered unre-
corded User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) as
the recording target.
Track 1 will be selected as recording target of the
melody, and the Track A will be selected as
recording target of the accompaniment part (the
chord progression for the Style or the key change
for the Pattern) automatically. If a User Song was
selected beforehand, recording data will overwrite
Tracks 1 and A of the selected Song.
To exit from this status, press the [REC] button
again.
4
Start recording.
When you press the [SONG] button in step 2, play any note
to start recording.
When you select a Style in step 2, play a chord in the Auto
Accompaniment area to start recording with Style play-
back, or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording
only with playback of the Rhythm part of a Style.
When you select a Pattern in step 2, play a key in the
Accompaniment area or press the [START/STOP] button to
start recording with Pattern playback.
The current measure will be shown on the display
while recording.
5
Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) or [REC] but-
ton to stop recording.
When using a Style, you can stop recording also
by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button, and
then waiting until playback ends.
• This instrument records your performance and save it in an original format. If you want MIDI data, convert it to SMF by saving it to the
connected USB flash drive (page 65).
NOTE
Track Structure of a Song
Quick Recording
Melody Tracks
Accompani-
ment Track
• The ACMP on/off status cannot be changed after the
[REC] button is pressed.
User 1
001
pEC
Flashes
Flashes
NOTE
User 1
003
pEC
Current measure number
or
Recording Your Performance
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
33
Quick Guide
After recording finishes, “Writing!” appears indi-
cating that the recorded data is being stored, and
then the recorded track numbers in the display
will light.
6
To play back the recorded Song, press
the [ ] (Start/Stop) button.
This section explains how to record to a specified
track. This is useful when you want to record the
additional performances to an already recorded
Song, or re-record only one track of an already
recorded Song.
1
Press the [SONG] button, and then select
the desired User Song from 031–040
(User 1–10) as the recording target.
2
While holding down the [REC] button,
press the desired Track button to enter
the Record Ready mode.
If you want to record only the melody:
While holding down the [REC] button, press
one of the [1/RIGHT]–[5] buttons.
If you want to record only the Style play-
back:
Press the [STYLE] button, select the desired
Style, then simultaneously hold down the
[REC] button and press the [A] button. ACMP
is automatically turned on.
• Never attempt to turn the power off whenWriting!” is
shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of
data.
When recording Pattern playback with Retrigger
Note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome
and Arpeggio playback are not synchronized with play-
back of the recorded Song.
Limitations while recording
The on/off status of ACMP cannot be changed.
Playback cannot be changed between Style and Pat-
tern.
The Pattern number can be changed while the Style
number cannot.
When you use a Style/Pattern, the following parame-
ters cannot be changed: Reverb Type, Chorus Type,
Time Signature, Style number and Style/Pattern Vol-
ume.
Performance with a Split Voice cannot be recorded.
The audio input from an external device (playback
sound on the connected computer or audio device)
cannot be recorded.
NOTICE
NOTE
Recording to a Specified Track
User 1
031
User 1
001
pEC
Selected track
flashes
Flashes
Press and hold
Press and hold
Recording Your Performance
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
34
Quick Guide
If you want to record only the Pattern
playback:
Press the [PATTERN] button, then select the
desired Pattern. While holding down the [REC]
button, press the [A] button. ACMP is automat-
ically turned on.
3
Same as in steps 4 to 6 (page 32) in
“Quick Recording.
You can clear all tracks of a User Song.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then select the
User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) to
be cleared.
2
Hold down the track [1/RIGHT] and [A]
buttons simultaneously for longer than
a second.
A confirmation message will appear on the dis-
play.
3
Press the [+/YES] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the dis-
play. To cancel this operation, press the [-] button.
4
Press the [+/YES] button to clear the
Song.
A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly
on the display.
This lets you clear individual tracks from a User
Song.
1
Press the [SONG] button, and then
select the desired User Song from 031–
040 (User 1–10).
2
From [1/RIGHT]–[5] and [A], press the
Track button to be cleared for longer
than a second.
A confirmation message will appear on the dis-
play.
3
Press the [+/YES] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the dis-
play.To cancel this operation, press the [-] button.
4
Press the [+/YES] button to clear the
track.
A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly
on the display.
• If the memory becomes full while recording, an alert
message will appear and recording will stop automati-
cally. In this case, delete unnecessary data by using the
Clear functions (below), then execute the recording
again.
Clearing a User Song
Press and hold
NOTE
Hold simultaneously
for longer than a second.
ClrUser1
YES
Clearing a Specified Track from
a User Song
Hold for longer than
a second.
ClrTr1
YES
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
35
Quick Guide
Memorizing Your Favorite Settings (Registration Memory)
The Registration Memory function allows
you to save (or “register”) panel settings
such as Voice and Style to a Registration
Memory button, and then instantly recall
your custom panel settings by simply press-
ing a single button. The registered settings
for four Registration Memory buttons will be
saved as a single Bank.
1
Make the desired settings, such as
those for Voice, Style, and Pattern.
2
Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY
[BANK/MEMORY] button to call up a Bank
number on the display.
3
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select a Bank number.
4
While holding down the [BANK/MEM-
ORY] button, press one of the [1]–[4]
buttons to memorize the current panel
settings.
A “Writing!” message appears indicating that the
panel settings will be stored.
1
Press and release the [BANK/MEMORY]
button to call up a Bank number on the
display.
2
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select a Bank number.
3
Press one of the REGISTRATION MEM-
ORY [1]–[4] buttons to call up the panel
settings you memorized.
The recalled Registration Memory number
appears in the display for a few seconds.
Up to 32 settings (eight banks of four each) can
be memorized.
Memory 1
8 Banks
Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4
Memorizing Panel Settings to
the Registration Memory
• Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during
Song playback.
• If you select a Registration Memory number that
already contains data, the previous data is deleted
and overwritten by the new data.
• Never attempt to turn the power off whenWriting!” is
shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of
data.
NOTE
Bank
1
Bank number
Press and
hold
NOTICE
Recalling Panel Settings from
the Registration Memory
• When the [SONG] lamp is lit, the Style or Pattern settings
will not be recalled even if you press the REGISTRA-
TION MEMORY button to which the Style or Pattern set-
tings are memorized. To recall Style/Pattern settings,
make sure to press the [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button
beforehand.
Parameters that can be memorized to Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings: Style number, ACMP on/off, Style vol-
ume, Track on/off, Main section A/B, Tempo
Pattern settings: Pattern number, Pattern volume, Sec-
tion, Track on/off, Tempo
Voice settings:
Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the
related Functions (page 58)
Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the
related Functions
Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the
related Functions
Effect settings: Reverb Type, Chorus Type
Arpeggio settings: Arpeggio on/off and all settings of
the related Functions
Harmony settings: Harmony on/off and all settings of
the related Functions
DSP: Parameter values of Knobs A/B and settings of the
related Functions
Other settings: Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob
Effect Combination number, Split Point, Scale Tune
REGIST 1
1
Registration
Memory number
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
36
Quick Guide
Connecting to Other Devices
By connecting an audio device such as a portable
music player to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, you
can output the sound of the audio device through the
built-in speakers of this instrument. This lets you play
the keyboard along with the playback of your audio
player.
1
Connect the headphone jack of an audio
device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack
by using an audio cable.
2
Turn on the audio device, and then this
instrument.
3
Start play back of the connected audio
device.
The sound of the audio device is output through
the speakers of this instrument.
4
Adjust the volume balance between the
audio device and this instrument.
Adjust the audio playback volume on the audio
device, then adjust the entire volume by rotating
the [MASTER VOLUME] control of the instru-
ment.
5
Play the keyboard along with the sound
of audio device.
6
After finishing the performance, stop
playback of the audio device.
Connecting the [USB TO HOST] terminal of this
instrument and the computer via a USB cable allows
you to transmit/receive MIDI and Audio data to/from
the computer. For details on using a computer with
this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page
11) “Computer-related Operations.
• Before connecting the instrument to external devices, turn off the power of all the devices. Also, before turning the power on or
off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the devices or electrical shock may occur.
CAUTION
Playing an External Audio
Device with the Built-in
Speakers
• To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to
the external device, and then to the instrument. When turn-
ing off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument,
and then to the external device.
• If you are using a computer or a smart device such as an
iPhone/iPad, you can also connect it to the [USB TO
HOST] terminal (see “Connecting to a Computer,” at
right).
NOTICE
Stereo mini plug
Audio device (portable
music player, etc.)
Headphone
jack
Audio cable
Stereo mini plug
NOTE
• If you want to adjust the volume balance between the
audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pat-
tern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number
5, then turn Knob A (page 46).
The audio input volume from the [AUX IN] jack can also
be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function
004). If you increase the volume to more than 50, the
audio device sound may be distorted.
• You can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of
audio playback. For details, refer to page 37.
Connecting to a Computer
NOTE
NOTE
USB cable
USB
terminal
Instrument
Computer
[USB TO HOST]
terminal
Connecting to Other Devices
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
37
Quick Guide
You can use a smart device, such as an iPhone or
iPad, with the instrument for a variety of musical pur-
poses by connecting it to the instrument’s [USB TO
HOST] terminal. For details on connections, refer to
the online PDF manual (page 11) “iPhone/iPad Con-
nection Manual.” For information about the compati-
ble smart devices and application tools, access the
following page:
http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/
When you output the audio sound of an external
audio device or a computer connected to the [AUX
IN] jack or the [USB TO HOST] terminal through this
instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the
melody part of audio playback. You can use the func-
tion to practice the melody part along with the audio
playback.
1
Play back audio on the connected exter-
nal device.
2
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton to turn it on.
3
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton again to turn it off.
Files that can be transferred from a computer
to this instrument (and vice versa).
Song file: .mid (SMF format 0/1)
Style file: .sty
Backup file: PSR-E453.BUP* (PSR-E453)/
PSREW400.BUP* (PSR-EW400)
* Backup parameters (page 39) can be transferred and
saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single
file.
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0
cables cannot be used.
• If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this
instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Oth-
erwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings
of the computer or the application software.
• The volume can be adjusted on the computer, and also by
using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you
want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input
from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the
[ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob
A (page 46).
The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can
also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function
005).
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
• If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this
instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Oth-
erwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings
of the computer or the application software.
• Up to 256 Song files can be transferred to this instru-
ment.
• If you transfer a Style file from the computer to this
instrument, you need to load it to this instrument for Style
playback. For details, refer to “Loading a Style File”
(page 67).
NOTE
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTICE
• The volume can be adjusted on the smart device, and also by
using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you
want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input
from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the
[ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob
A (page 46).
The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can
also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function
005).
Using the Melody Suppressor
• Depending on the particular music source, the melody
or vocal sound may not be cancelled as expected even
when if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. In such a
case, try adjusting the pan position to be cancelled in
the Function Settings (page 59, Function 039).
• When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO
HOST] terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Func-
tion 058) is set to OFF, the Melody Suppressor function
cannot be used.
NOTE
MelodySP
on
NOTE
Connecting to Other Devices
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
38
Quick Guide
You can connect a stereo system to amplify the
instrument’s sound by using the OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R]
jacks.
You can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME]
dial to adjust the volume of the sound output to the
external device.
You can set whether the sound of this instrument is
always output from its built-in speaker or not.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “SP Mute” (Function 067).
3
Use the dial to select the desired setting.
When Speaker Mute set to “ON,” the Speaker
sound is off. You can only hear the instrument
sound via the headphones or an external device
connected to the [OUTPUT] jacks.
When Speaker Mute set to “OFF,” the speaker
sound is always on as long as headphones are
not connected.
Using an External Stereo
System for Playback (OUTPUT
[L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400)
• Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resis-
tance.
• Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural
device.
• To avoid possible damage, first turn on the power to the
instrument, then to the external device. When turning off
the power, first turn off the power to the external device,
then to the instrument. Since this instrument’s power may
automatically be turned off due to the Auto Power Off func-
tion (page 16), turn off the power to the external device, or
disable Auto Power Off when you do not intend to operate
the instrument.
• Do not route the output from the OUTPUT jacks to the
[AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input
at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the [OUTPUT] jacks and
then back again, creating a feedback loop that could make
normal performance impossible, and may even damage
the equipment.
Phone plug
(standard)
Audio cable
Phone plug
(standard)
Input jack
Powered speaker
Audio signal
NOTE
NOTE
NOTICE
NOTICE
Speaker Mute On/Off Setting
(PSR-EW400)
SP Mute
OFF
067
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
39
Quick Guide
Backup and Initialization
The following Backup parameters will be maintained
even if the power is turned off.
In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the
data (including Style data that have not been loaded)
transferred from the connected computer will be
maintained even if you turn off the power.
You can erase the backup parameters described
above, and then restores all the default factory set-
tings.
You can initialize the instrument via the following two
methods.
Backup Clear
This operation initializes the backup parameters.
While holding down the highest white key, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
Flash Clear
This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that
have been transferred from a computer. Note that
Style data loaded to Style numbers 221–230 will be
maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest
white key and the three highest black keys, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
Backup Parameters
Backup parameters
User Songs (page 32)
Style data transferred from a computer and loaded to
Style numbers 221–230 (page 67)
Registration Memory (page 35)
FUNCTION Settings: (page 58)
Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume,
Song Volume, Pattern Volume, Metronome Volume,
Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Master EQ type,
Audio Loop Back on/off, Your Tempo on/off, Auto
Power Off Time, Battery Type, Language
Initializing the Instrument
• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you
have purchased. Be sure to save important data to a com-
puter. For details, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11)
“Computer-related Operations.
PSR-EW400
PSR-E453
The highest white key
PSR-EW400
PSR-E453
The highest white key
and the three highest
black keys
NOTICE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
40
Reference
Handy Performance Features
Selecting a Reverb Type
The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert
hall type ambience.
Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the
optimum Reverb type for the entire sound, you can
select a different Reverb type manually.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Reverb” (Function 036).
After a few seconds, the current Reverb type
appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type.
Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-
mation about the available Reverb types, refer to
the Effect Type List in the separate Data List.
Selecting a Chorus Type
The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that sounds
like many of the same Voices being played in unison.
Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the
optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can
select a different Chorus type manually.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Chorus” (Function 037).
After a few seconds, the current Chorus type
appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type.
Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-
mation about the available Chorus types, refer to
the Effect Type List in the separate Data List.
• Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot
be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style
is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display.
Adjusting the Reverb depth
You can adjust the Reverb depth applied to the
Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the
same operations above. Regarding the item in step
2, refer to the Function List on page 59.
Reverb
036
Hall2
02
036
Current Reverb type
NOTE
• Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot
be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style
is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display.
Adjusting the Chorus depth
You can adjust the Chorus depth applied to the
Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the
same operations above. Regarding the item in step
2, refer to the Function List on page 59.
Chorus
037
Chorus1
1
037
Current Chorus type
NOTE
Reference
Handy Performance Features
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
41
Reference
Pitch Controls—Transpose
The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the
Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down by a
maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments.
1
Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to call
up “Transpos” (Function 006).
2
Use the dial to set the Transpose value
between -12 and +12.
Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning
The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the
Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down between
427.0 Hz and 453.0 Hz in approximately 0.2 Hz incre-
ments. The default value is 440.0 Hz.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Tuning” (Function 007).
3
Use the dial to set the Tuning value.
Pitch Controls—the [PITCH
BEND] wheel
The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add
smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the key-
board. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or
downward to lower the pitch.
You can change the amount of pitch bend produced
by the wheel in the Function Settings (page 58, Func-
tion 008).
Calling Up Optimum Panel
Settings—One Touch Setting
(OTS)
Select a Song, Style or Pattern by pressing the
[SONG], [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button, then select
Voice number 000 OTS (page 20). This lets you auto-
matically call up the optimum panel settings such as
Voice and tempo for the current Song, Style or Pat-
tern.
Transpos
00
006
Tuning
007
440.0Hz
007
Handy Performance Features
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
42
Reference
Changing the Touch Response of
the Keyboard
The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a
Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically
and expressively control the level of the Voices
according to your playing strength.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “TouchRes” (Function 010).
After a few seconds, the current Touch Response
appears.
3
Use the dial to select a Touch Response
setting between 1 and 4.
Touch Response
Selecting an EQ Setting for the
Best Sound
Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you
the best possible sound when listening through differ-
ent reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal
speakers, headphones, or an external speaker sys-
tem.
1
Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR]
button for longer than a second to call
up “Master EQ” (Function 038).
After a few seconds, the current Master EQ type
appears.
2
Rotate the dial to select the desired Mas-
ter EQ type.
Master EQ types
1Soft
Allows maximum loudness to be pro-
duced with relatively light key pres-
sure.
2Medium
Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard
response.
3Hard
Requires that the keys be played quite
hard to produce maximum loudness.
4Fixed
All notes are produced at the same
volume no matter how hard the key-
board is played.
TouchRes
010
Medium
2
010
Current Touch
Response
1 Speaker
Optimum for listening via the instru-
ment’s built-in speakers.
2 Headphone
Optimum for headphones, or for listen-
ing via external speakers.
3Boost
Features more powerful sound.
Depending on the selected Voice and
Style, etc., the sound may be more
subject to distortion than other EQ
types.
4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance.
5Bright
Lowers the mid range for a brighter
sound.
6 Mild
Lowers the high range for a softer
sound.
MasterEQ
038
Speaker
1
038
Current Master EQ
type
Hold for longer
than a second.
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
43
Reference
Scale Tuning
By default, the scale of this keyboard is set to Equal Temperament — the same tuning
as with any acoustic piano. However, the setting can be changed to any other scale
according to the music genre or music style you want to play.
Selecting a Scale
You can select a desired scale among the various
preset scales.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to
call up “Scale” (Function 048).
After a few seconds, the current scale appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select a scale.
The default setting is “1 Equal.
Preset Scale types
Setting the Base Note for Each
Scale
Please make sure to specify the appropriate base
note, if you select a scale other than Equal Tempera-
ment, or create an original scale via Scale Tune func-
tion.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to
call up “BaseNote” (Function 049).
After a few seconds, the current base note
appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select a base note
from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb
and B.
The default setting is “C.
1 Equal
2 Pure Major
3 Pure Minor
4Bayat (Arabic)
5 Rast (Arabic)
Scale
048
Equal
1
048
Current scale
BaseNote
049
C
01
049
Current base note
Scale Tuning
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
44
Reference
Tuning Each Note to Create an
Original Scale
You can tune the individual notes in cents (a “cent” is
1/100th of a semitone) to create your original scale.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “TuneNote” (Function 050).
After a few seconds, the current note appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select the note to be
tuned from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab,
A, Bb, B.
4
Press the CATEGORY [+] button to call
up “Tune” (Function 051).
After a few seconds, the tuning value of the note
selected in step 3 appears.
5
Rotate the dial to tune the note over a
range of -64 to +63.
The setting can be reset to the initial default value
by pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simul-
taneously.
6
Repeat steps 2–5 as desired.
7
Memorize the settings here to the Regis-
tration Memory as desired (page 35).
TuneNote
050
C
01
050
Current tuning note
Tune C
051
00
Tune
051
Tun i n g v al u e
• When pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simulta-
neously after recalling an original scale memorized to
Registration Memory, the scale will return to the original
scale registered to Registration Memory, not to the
default tune value.
• When calling up “Scale(Function 048) after using indi-
vidual note scale tuning, “(Edited)” will be shown in the
display. However, the edited scale settings will be
erased by calling up another scale. For this reason, the
edited settings should be memorized to the Registration
Memory.
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
45
Reference
Voice Settings
Selecting a Dual Voice
1
Hold down the [DUAL] button for longer
than a second to call up “D.Voice”
(Function 020).
After a few seconds, the current Dual Voice
appears.
2
Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual
Voice .
Selecting a Split Voice
1
Hold down the [SPLIT] button for longer
than a second to call up “S.Voice”
(Function 030).
After a few seconds, the current Split Voice
appears.
2
Rotate the dial to select the desired Split
Voice .
Voice Editing
For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can
edit the parameters such as volume, octave and
depth of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to cre-
ate new, custom sounds that best suit your musical
needs.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up the desired item.
Voice parameters are indicated as below.
• Main Voice parameters: M.****** (Function
011–019)
• Dual Voice parameters: D.****** (Function
020–029)
• Split Voice parameters: S.****** (Function
030–035)
For details on each parameter, refer to the Func-
tion List on page 59.
3
Rotate the dial to set the value.
Check the sound by playing the keyboard.
4
Repeat steps 2–3 above to edit various
parameters.
5
If necessary, memorize the settings to
the Registration Memory (page 35).
The Voice-related settings are reset when a differ-
ent Voice is selected. If you want to store the cre-
ated sound for future recall, memorize the
settings to the Registration Memory.
D.Voice
020
Chamber
071
020
Current Dual Voice
Hold for longer
than a second.
S.Voice
030
FngrBass
054
030
Current Split Voice
Hold for longer
than a second.
M.Volume
064
011
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
46
Reference
Parameters Assigned to the Knobs
This section describes each of the parameters which can be assigned to the Knobs (page 25).
z Filter
Filter effects shape the sound by allowing only a
specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by pro-
ducing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” fre-
quency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of
synthesizer-like sounds.
Knob A: CUTOFF
Adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the
brightness of the sound. Turning the knob to the left
makes the sound more muffled or darker, while turn-
ing the knob A to the right makes the sound brighter.
Knob B: RESONANCE
Adjusts the amount of Resonance applied at the fil-
ter’s cutoff frequency. Turning the knob to the right will
increases the Resonance to emphasize the frequen-
cies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens”
the perceived effect of the filter.
x Effect
Knob A: REVERB
Reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall
or club. Turning the knob to the right increases the
Reverb depth.
Knob B: CHORUS
Produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Turning
the knob to the right increases the Chorus depth.
c EG (Envelope Generator)
Envelope Generator effects determine how the level
of the sound varies over time. You can make the
attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower
for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can
lengthen or shorten the sustain to best match the
music you’re playing.
Knob A: ATTACK
Adjusts the Attack Time (the amount of time it takes
the sound to reach maximum level when a key is
played). Turning the knob to the right increases the
Attack Time, thus slowing down the attack rate.
Knob B: RELEASE
Adjusts the Release Time (the amount of time it
takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is
released). Turning the knob to the right increases the
Release Time, thus making a longer sustain.
v Style Filter
Same as z. These effects are applied only to Style
or Pattern playback.
b Volume Balance/Pattern Retrigger
Knob A: VOLUME BALANCE
Adjusts the volume balance between the audio play-
back volume from the connected audio device (page
36) or the computer (page 36) and the Song/Style/
Pattern. Turning the knob to the left decreases the
external audio volume, while turning it to the right
decreases the instrument volume.
• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played
on the keyboard.
• Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass fre-
quencies.
NOTE
Level
Frequency
Cutoff Frequency
Frequencies in this
range are passed.
Frequencies in this
range are cut off.
Level
Frequency
Resonance
• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played
on the keyboard.
• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played
on the keyboard.
NOTE
Sustain Level
Level
Time
Key Played Key Released
ATTACK DECAY RELEASE
NOTE
Parameters Assigned to the Knobs
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
47
Reference
Even when there is no audio input from an external
device, the volume of Song, Style and Pattern can be
adjusted by using the knob. The volume of Voices
played on the keyboard cannot be adjusted.
Knob B: RETRIGGER RATE
Adjusts the Retrigger Rate (the length of the part to
be repeated) of the Pattern Retrigger function (page
52). Turning this knob to the right decreases it, and
turning the knob to the left increases it.
n DSP
Knob A/B: DSP PARAMETER A/B
With the digital effects built into the instrument, you
can add DSP effects to your keyboard performance
and the playback sound of Style, etc. (page 48).
Each effect has two parameters which are assigned
to Knobs A and B. By turning the knobs in real-time,
you can alter the music in various dynamic ways,
such as changing the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the
rotary speaker or changing the degree of the Distor-
tion.
The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs.
Some Ideas for Using the Knobs
• When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST] ter-
minal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Function 058) is set to
OFF, you cannot adjust the volume of audio playback input
from the external device.
• When setting the tempo of the Pattern playback to more than
200, turning the knob to the right cannot change the length to
be repeated.
NOTE
NOTE
Number/Effect Try This
z
Filter
Select “143 Gemini” (a synth-lead type Voice) or “170 Noise” (page 20). Turning Knobs A
or B while playing gives you the dynamic filter-sweep effects of an analog synthesizer.
x
Effect
Select the Voice “008 CP80.” Turn Knobs A and B all the way down to hear the direct,
unprocessed sound of the Voice. As you turn Knob B toward the right, a Chorus effect
with modulation is gradually applied to the sound. Turning Knob A to the right adds a
Reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall.
c
EG
Select the Voice “173 RSAnPad.” Turning Knob A all the way down makes the attack
faster, and lets you hear the crisp, clear sound of the original Voice. Turning Knob B all
the way down shortens the amount of time for the sound to decay to silence after a key is
released. These knobs let you finely adjust the Voice to create the appropriate sound for
the particular song you’re playing.
v
Style Filter
Select the Style, “057 EuTrance.” Turn on the [ACMP ON/OFF] button and start Style
playback (page 26). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The
overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled compared to the original, with the
drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact.
b
Volume Balance/
Pattern Retrigger
Knob A: Connect an audio device or a computer (page 36), then turn this knob while
playing audio on the external device. You can adjust the volume balance between the
performance on this instrument and the audio input.
Knob B: Select the Section C of the Pattern “002 FrenchDJ” and start Pattern playback.
Turn this knob to the right while holding down the Section button C, and you can pro-
gressively shorten the Retrigger rate like a DJ would in performance.
n
DSP
Select the Voice, “019 Cool!Org.” Press the [DSP] button to turn the DSP on, then set the
DSP type (Function 040) to “01 RotarySp,” and the DSP part (Function 041) to “1 Key-
board” (page 60). Adjust the effect depth by turning Knob B while playing the keyboard,
then use Knob A to change the rotating speed of the rotary speaker. When you move it
slowly, you can create gradual speed changes like on a real rotary speaker.
Parameters Assigned to the Knobs
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
48
Reference
Adding DSP Effects
DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Pro-
cessor. DSP effects are applied only to a specified
part as described below.
Parts to which DSP effects are applied
1
Press the [DSP] button to turn DSP on.
Although turning on DSP will select a DSP type
suitable for the current panel setting, you can
select a different DSP type as described in the
following steps.
2
Hold down the [DSP] button for longer
than a second to call up “DSP Type”
(Function 040).
After a few seconds, the current DSP type
appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select a DSP type.
For information about the available DSP types,
refer to the Effect Type List in the Data List.
4
Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to
call up “DSP Part” (Function 041).
After a few seconds, the current part to which the
DSP effects are applied appears.
5
Rotate the dial to select a part to which
the DSP effects are applied.
Refer to the chart of “Parts to which DSP effects
are applied” (see left), and select “Keyboard” or
“Style.
6
Press the [ASSIGN] button several times
to assign Function 6 to the knobs (page
25).
7
Turn the knobs while playing the part
selected in step 5 to see how the DSP
effects change.
8
Press the [DSP] button again to turn
DSP off.
DSP part: Keyboard
• Main Voice
• Dual Voice
• Track 1 of a User Song
When selecting the “Keyboard” part for DSP
DSP
• ON/OFF
• Type
DSP part: Style
• Style
• Pattern
• Track A of a User Song
When selecting the “Style” part for DSP
Output
Output
Output
Output
DSP part: Keyboard
• Main Voice
• Dual Voice
• Track 1 of a User Song
DSP
• ON/OFF
• Type
DSP part: Style
• Style
• Pattern
• Track A of a User Song
This parameter is set in step 5.
Appears when
the DSP is on.
DSP Type
040
RotarySp
01
040
Current DSP type
Hold for longer
than a second.
Limitations when recording a Song
DSP effects can be recorded only to Tracks 1
and A.
The DSP type and part cannot be changed
while recording.
When recording to an existing User Song, if the
part to which the DSP effects are applied differs
from the recording tracks, DSP related setting
data (DSP part, type, parameter A/B) will not
be recorded or overwritten.
The DSP effects may not be applied as
expected when a User Song is being played
back. This is because the DSP effects are
affected by the data recorded to the User Song.
DSP Part
041
Keyboard
041
1
Current Part
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
49
Reference
Arpeggio Settings
Synchronizing an Arpeggio to
Song/Style/Pattern Playback—
Arpeggio Quantize
When you play the keyboard to trigger an Arpeggio
(page 24) along with Song/Style/Pattern playback,
you’ll need to play the notes with correct timing to
keep the Arpeggio in synchronization with the other
playback tracks. However, your actual timing may be
slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both). The
Arpeggio Quantize” function of this instrument will
correct any slight imperfections in the timing (accord-
ing to settings below), and then play back the Arpeg-
gio appropriately.
Synchronizing to quarter notes
Synchronizing to 8th notes
No synchronization
Although the Arpeggio Quantize value is pre-pro-
grammed for each Arpeggio Type, you can change
the value manually.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Quantize” (Function 046).
After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio Quan-
tize value appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select a value from
“OFF,” “1/8” and “1/16.
1/8 Synchronizing to quarter notes
1/16 Synchronizing to 8th notes
OFF No synchronization
Holding the Arpeggio Playback
via the Footswitch
You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback
continues even after the note has been released, by
pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN]
jack.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Pdl Func” (Function 047).
After a few seconds, the current pedal setting
appears.
3
Rotate the dial to select “Arp Hold.
If you want to restore the footswitch function to
sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both
hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.
4
Try playing Arpeggio with the foot-
switch.
Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then
press the footswitch. Even if you release the
notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop
Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch.
Quantize
046
1/8
2
046
Current value
Pdl Func
047
Sustain
1
047
Current setting
Arp Hold
2
047
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
50
Reference
Style and Pattern Settings
Style Variations—Sections
Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the
song you are playing.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the Main section.
The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. Playback of the Main section repeats indefinitely until
another Sections button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback sound
changes harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand.
AUTO FILL
This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B.
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the Ending finishes, the Style playback stops automatically.
The length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
1
Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate
the dial to select a Style.
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn
ACMP on.
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
Synchro Start on.
To turn off Synchro Start, press the [SYNC
START] button.
Synchro Start
When Synchro Start is on, Style playback will
begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto
Accompaniment area of the keyboard.
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to
select Main A or Main B.
INTRO MAIN A/B
ENDING AUTO FILL
Appears when ACMP
is turned on.
Beat arrows
flash.
MAIN A
Current Section
(Main A or B)
Style and Pattern Settings
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
51
Reference
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Now, you’re ready to start Style playback of the
Intro and then the Main A (or B) section.
6
Play a chord with your left hand to start
playback of the Intro.
For information on how to play chords, see
“Chords” on page 54.
7
After the Intro finishes, play the key-
board according to the progression of
the Song you are playing.
Play chords with your left hand while playing mel-
odies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/
AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will
change to Fill-in then Main A or B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
The Section switches to the Ending. When the
Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-
cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow
down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-
ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing
back.
Style Synchro Stop
When you press the [SYNC STOP] button to turn on
this function, the Style will only play while pressing
chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the key-
board. Releasing all the notes will stop Style play-
back.
Turning Each Style Track On/Off
As printed on the front panel, a Style consists of six
tracks. Turn on/off each track via the TRACK CON-
TROL buttons. Each of the tracks can be muted so
that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing
the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/
off status.
• Style numbers 196, 208–220 have no rhythm parts, so no
rhythm will play. When one of these Styles is selected, turn
ACMP on, then specify the chord in the left hand area to play
Style parts other than the Rhythm part.
INTRO≥A
Split Point
Auto Accom-
paniment
area
FILL A≥B
ENDING
NOTE
• This function can be used when ACMP is turned on.
• Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for
turning Tracks on or off.
Appears when the
synchro-stop func-
tion is engaged.
NOTE
On/off status is shown in
the display (page 19)
NOTE
Style and Pattern Settings
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
52
Reference
Pattern Variations—Sections
Like the Styles, each Pattern features several Sec-
tions, allowing you to add dynamic variations to the
performance. Five Sections (A–E) are provided.
Unlike the Styles, however, Patterns do not have the
Sections dedicated to the beginning or ending of the
Song, such as Intro and Ending. All Sections A–E will
play back repeatedly until stopped manually.
Pattern Retrigger Function
This function restarts Pattern playback from the
beginning.
1
Press the [PATTERN] button, then rotate
the dial to select the desired Pattern.
2
Press the [START/STOP] button or press
any key in the Auto Accompaniment
area to start Pattern playback (page 27).
3
By pressing the button of the currently
playing Section, you can restart play-
back from the beginning. Holding down
the button lets loop-play only the top
portion of the Section.
The top portion length (Retrigger Rate) can be
changed by using the knob (page 47).
Changing the Tempo
A Style or Pattern can be played at any tempo you
desire—fast or slow.
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up
the Tempo value in the display.
2
Rotate the dial to set a tempo from 011 to
280.
Pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simulta-
neously can instantly reset the value to the
default tempo of the current Style or Pattern. You
can change the tempo during playback by press-
ing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the
required tempo.
Tap Start
You can start play back of the Style, Pattern or Song
by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the
required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4
(4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/
4, etc.).
• When recording Pattern playback with the Retrigger function,
note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome and
Arpeggio playback is not synchronized with playback of the
recorded Song.
NOTE
• The above operation applies also to Song or Arpeggio
playback tempo.
• Tap tempo setting range: 32–280
Tempo
090
Current Tempo
NOTE
NOTE
Style and Pattern Settings
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
53
Reference
Adjusting the Volume of the Style
or Pattern
You can adjust the volume balance between Style or
Pattern playback and your keyboard performance.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “StyleVol” (Function 001) or
“PatrnVol” (Function 003).
3
Rotate the dial to set the volume
between 000 and 127.
Setting the Split Point
The point on the keyboard that separates the left-
hand area and the right-hand area of the keyboard is
called the “Split Point.” The left-hand area is used to
specify the chord for Style playback, to specify the
key for Pattern playback, or to play the Split Voice.
The default Split Point is key number 054 (the F#2
key), but you can change it to another key.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “SplitPnt” (Function 009).
You can call up this display also by pressing the
[STYLE] then holding the [ACMP] button for lon-
ger than a second.
3
Rotate the dial to set the Split Point
between 036 (C1) and 096 (C6) (on the
PSR-E453) or 028 (E0) and 103 (G6) (on
the PSR-EW400).
Playing Chords Without Style
Playback (Stop Accompaniment)
If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP
ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON
icon appears), and play the chord in the Auto Accom-
paniment area of the keyboard (with SYNC START
off), the chord sound will be heard without Style play-
back. This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.
The specified chord will be shown in the display, and
affects the Harmony function (page 23).
StyleVol
100
001
Style (or Pattern)
volume
• During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be
changed.
SplitPnt
054
009
Split Point
Split Voice,
chords (Style) or
keys (Pattern)
Main Voice (and Dual Voice)
Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2)
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
NOTE
Auto
Accompani-
ment area
Specified chord
Appears when auto
accompaniment is on
Style and Pattern Settings
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
54
Reference
Chord Types for Style Playback
For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and
many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.
indicates the root note.
• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:
m7, m7
b
5, m7(11), 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2
• Inversion of the 7sus4 chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.
• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown
on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played.
Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh
Easy Chords
This method lets you easily play chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard using only one,
two, or three fingers.
For root “C”
To play a major chord
Press the root note ()
of the chord.
To play a minor chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
black key to the left of it.
To play a seventh chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
white key to the left of it.
To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together
with the nearest white and
black keys to the left of it (three
keys altogether).
C
Cm
7
C
Cm
7
CM
7
D
Dm
7
D
Dm
7
DM
7
E
Em
7
E
Em
7
EM
7
C
F
Fm
7
F
Fm
7
FM
7
G
Gm
7
G
Gm
7
GM
7
A
Am
7
A
Am
7
AM
7
B
Bm
7
B
Bm
7
BM
7
C
Cm
C
7
Cm
7
Style and Pattern Settings
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
55
Reference
Looking Up Chords Using the
Chord Dictionary
The Dictionary function is useful when you know the
name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn
how to play it.
1
Press and hold the [LESSON] button for
longer than a second to call up “Dict.
This operation will divide the entire keyboard into
the three ranges as illustrated below.
The range to the right of “ROOT”:
Lets you specify the chord root, but produces
no sound.
The range between “CHORD TYPE” and
“ROOT”:
Lets you specify the chord type, but produces
no sound.
The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE”:
Lets you play and confirm the chord specified
in the above two ranges.
2
As an example, learn how to play a GM7
(G major seventh) chord.
2-1.
Press the “G” key in the section to the right
of “ROOT” so that the “G” is shown as the
root note.
2-2.
Press the key labeled “M7” in the section
between “CHORD TYPE” and “ROOT.
The notes you should play for the specified
chord (root note and chord type) are con-
veniently shown in the display, both as
notation and in the keyboard diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord, press
the [+/YES] or [-/NO] button.
3
Following the notation and keyboard
diagram in the display, try playing a
chord in the range to the left of “CHORD
TYPE.
When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell
sound signals your success and the chord name
in the display flashes.
Dict.
Hold for longer than
a second.
The
highest
key
Chord Type range Root range
Keyboard
playing range
Dict.
001
• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually
indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers
to C major. However, when specifying major chords
here, make sure to press the key of “M” (major) after
pressing the root note.
Specifying only the key for Pattern play-
back
Note that you need to specify only the root note for
Pattern playback, unlike Style playback for which
you also need to specify the chord type.
Dict.
001
Chord name (root and type)Notation of chord
Individual notes of chord
(keyboard)
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
56
Reference
Song Settings
BGM (Background Music)
Playback
With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button
will play back only a few of the internal Songs repeat-
edly. This setting can be changed so that, for exam-
ple, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs
transferred to the instrument from a computer are
played back, letting you use the instrument as a
background music source. Five playback group set-
tings are provided. Simply select the one that suits
your needs.
1
Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer
than a second to call up “DemoGrp.
After a few seconds, the current repeat playback
group appears.
2
Rotate the dial to select a repeat play-
back group from the table below.
3
Press the [DEMO] button to start play-
back.
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again.
Random Song Playback
The order of Song repeat playback via the [DEMO]
button can be changed between the numerical order
and random order.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “PlayMode” (Function 066).
After a few seconds, the current playback mode
appears.
When the DemoGrp is set to “Demo,” this param-
eter cannot be set.
3
Rotate the dial to select “Random.
To return to the numerical order, select “Normal.
4
Press the [DEMO] button to start play-
back.
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again.
Demo Preset Songs 001–003
Preset All preset Songs
User All User Songs
Download All Songs transferred from a computer
USB
All Songs (MIDI files) in the connected USB
flash drive
• When User Songs, Download Songs and USB Songs
data do not exist, Demo Songs are played back.
DemoGrp
065
Hold for longer than
a second.
NOTE
PlayMode
066
Song Settings
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
57
Reference
Tempo Setting of the Song
This operation is same as that of the Style and Pat-
tern. Refer to page 52.
Tap Start
This operation is same as that of the Style and Pat-
tern. Refer to page 52.
Song Volume
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “SongVol” (Function 002).
3
Rotate the dial to set the Song volume
between 000 and 127.
Melody Voice Setting of the
Preset Song
You can change the Melody Voice of the current Pre-
set Song temporarily to any other desired Voice.
1
Press the [SONG] button, select the
desired Preset Song, then start playback
(page 28).
2
Press the [VOICE] button, then rotate the
dial to select the desired Voice.
3
Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer
than a second to call up “SONG MEL-
ODY VOICE.
After a few seconds, the Melody Voice of the
Song will be changed to that selected in step 2.
• Song volume can be adjusted while in the Song mode.
SongVol
002
100
Song volume
NOTE
• Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody
Voice.
• You cannot change the Melody Voice of a User Song.
Strings
070
SONG MEL
Hold for longer than
a second.
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
58
Reference
The Functions
The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as
Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Find the desired item in the Function List on
pages 58–61, then follow the instructions below.
Basic Procedure in the Function
Display
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button
several times until the desired item
appears.
3
Use the dial, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] but-
tons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to
set the value of the selected function.
To restore the default value, press the [+/YES]
and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. In the sole
case of the MIDI Initial Send function (Function
057), pressing the [+/YES] button executes the
function while pressing [-/NO] cancels it.
Some Function settings are maintained even if
you turn off the power, and can be transferred to a
computer as Backup Data (page 39).
Function List
SplitPnt
054
009
Current item
Current Function
number
• To exit from a Function display, press the [VOICE],
[STYLE], [SONG] or [PATTERN] button.
Direct
numeric entry
Press simultane-
ously to recall the
default setting.
•Increment
value by 1
•Execute
Decrement
value by 1
•Cancel
NOTE
Function Number
Function Display Range/Settings
Default
Value
Description
PSR-
E453
PSR-
EW400
Volume
001 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53.
002 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 57.
003 003 Pattern Volume PatrnVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53.
004 004
[AUX IN] Audio
Volume
AuxInVol 000–127 50
Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [AUX IN]
jack (page 36).
005 005
[USB TO HOST]
Audio Volume
USBInVol 000–127 100
Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [USB TO
HOST] terminal (page 36, 37).
Overall
006 006 Transpose Transpos -12–12 00 Refer to page 41.
007 007 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz Refer to page 41.
008 008 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 02
Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the
[PITCH BEND] wheel (page 41), in semitone increments.
009 009 Split Point SplitPnt
036–096
(C1–C6; PSR-E453)/
028–103
(E0–G6; PSR-EW400)
054 (F#2) Refer to page 53.
010 010 Touch Response TouchRes
1 (Soft), 2 (Medium),
3 (Hard), 4 (Fixed)
2 (Medium) Refer to page 42.
The Functions
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
59
Reference
Main Voice (page 20)
011 011 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice.
012 012 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.
013 013 Pan M.Pan
000 (left)–
064 (center)–
127 (right)
*
Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value
“127” results in the sound being panned full right.
014 014 Reverb Depth M.Reverb 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Main Voice's signal is sent to the
Reverb effect.
015 015 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
016 016 Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 064
Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice reaches
the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the
value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the
faster the attack rate.
017 017 Release Time M.Releas 000–127 064
Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice falls to 0
when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer
the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain.
018 018
Filter Cutoff
M.Cutoff 000–127 064
Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 46) of the Main
Voice.
019 019
Filter Resonance
M.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (
page 46
) of the Main Voice.
Dual Voice (page 21)
020 020 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–758 * Selects a Dual Voice.
021 021 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.
022 022 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.
023 023 Pan D.Pan
000 (left)–
064 (center)–
127 (right)
*
Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A value
of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of
“127” results in the sound being panned full right.
024 024 Reverb Depth D.Reverb 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the
Reverb effect.
025 025 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
026 026 Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 064
Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice reaches
the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the
value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the
faster the attack rate.
027 027 Release Time D.Releas 000–127 064
Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice falls to 0
when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer
the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain.
028 028
Filter Cutoff
D.Cutoff 000–127 064
Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (
page 46
) of the Dual
Voice.
029 029
Filter Resonance
D.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (
page 46
) of the Dual Voice.
Split Voice (page 21)
030 030 Split Voice S.Voice 001–758
054
(FngrBass)
Selects a Split Voice.
031 031 Volume S.Volume 000–127 080 Determines the volume of the Split Voice.
032 032 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 -1 Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.
033 033 Pan S.Pan
000 (left)–
064 (center)–
127 (right)
064
Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A value
of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of
“127” results in the sound being panned full right.
034 034 Reverb Depth S.Reverb 000–127 008
Determines how much of the Split Voices signal is sent to the
Reverb effect.
035 035 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 000
Determines how much of the Split Voices signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Effects
036 036 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Refer to page 40.
037 037 Chorus Type Chorus 1–6 ** Refer to page 40.
038 038 Master EQ Type MasterEQ
1 (Speaker),
2 (Headphone),
3 (Boost), 4 (Piano),
5 (Bright), 6 (Mild)
1 (Speaker) Refer to page 42.
039 039 Melody Suppressor SupprPan
L63, L62...L02, L01, C,
R01, R02...R62, R63
C
Determines the pan position to be cancelled when the Melody
Suppressor (page 37) is turned on.
Function Number
Function Display Range/Settings
Default
Value
Description
PSR-
E453
PSR-
EW400
The Functions
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
60
Reference
DSP (page 48)
040 040 DSP Type DSP Type 01–10 01
Refer to page 48.
041 041 DSP Part DSP Part
1 (Keyboard)
2 (Style)
1 (Keyboard)
Harmony (page 23)
042 042 Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type.
043 043 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.
Arpeggio (page 24)
044 044 Arpeggio Type ARP Type 001–150 * Determines the Arpeggio type.
045 045 Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru)
Depending
on the
Arpeggio
type
When “Thru” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback
are determined by your playing strength. When “Original” is
selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined
by the original setting regardless of your playing strength.
046 046 Arpeggio Quantize Quantize
1 (OFF), 2 (1/8),
3 (1/16)
Depending
on the
Arpeggio
type
Refer to page 49.
047 047 Pedal Function Pdl Func
1 (Sustain) /
2 (Arp Hold) /
3 (Hold+Sus)
* Refer to page 49.
Scale Tuning (page 43)
048 048 Scale Scale
1 (Equal),
2 (Pure Maj),
3 (Pure min),
4 (Bayat), 5 (Rast)
1 (Equal) Refer to page 43.
049 049 Base Note BaseNote
01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D),
04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F),
07 (F
#
), 08 (G), 09 (A
b
),
10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B)
01 (C) Refer to page 43.
050 050 Tuning Note TuneNote
01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D),
04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F),
07 (F
#
), 08 (G), 09 (A
b
),
10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B)
01 (C)
Refer to page 44.
051 051 Tuning Tune -64–63
Depending
on the Scale
MIDI
052 052 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the
internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record
your keyboard performance to application software on a com-
puter via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.
053 053 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-
nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record
your keyboard performance to application software on a com-
puter via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.
054 054 Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF ON
Determines whether MIDI messages generated via keyboard
performance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB
TO HOST] terminal.
055 055 Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style
playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO
HOST] terminal.
056 056 Song Out SongOut ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song
playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO
HOST] terminal.
057 057 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO -
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.
Press
[+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation
should be done immediately after starting the Recording
operation on a computer.
Audio (page 36)
058 058 Audio Loop Back LoopBack ON/OFF ON
Determines whether Audio sound input from the [USB TO
HOST] terminal is returned to the computer or not with the
performance played on the instrument. If you want to output
only the sound played on this instrument to the computer, set
this parameter to OFF.
Function Number
Function Display Range/Settings
Default
Value
Description
PSR-
E453
PSR-
EW400
The Functions
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
61
Reference
* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice.
** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Pattern.
Metronome (page 22)
059 059
Time Signature
Numerator
TimesigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
060 060
Time Signature
Denominator
TimesigD
Half note, Quarter
note, Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
** Determines the length of each metronome beat.
061 061 Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Lesson (page 30)
062 062 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16, OFF 01
Determines the guide track number for your right hand les-
son. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in
USB flash drive or transferred from a computer.
063 063 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16, OFF 02
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in
USB flash drive or transferred from a computer.
064 064 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON
This parameter is for Lesson 3 (WAITING). When set to ON,
playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you
are playing. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be main-
tained regardless of the speed at which you are playing.
Demo (page 28)
065 065 Demo Group DemoGrp
1 (Demo) / 2 (Preset) /
3 (User) / 4 (Down-
load) / 5 (USB)
1 (Demo) Refer to page 56.
066 066 Demo Play Mode PlayMode
1 (Normal)
2 (Random)
1 (Normal) Refer to page 56.
Speaker Mute (page 38)
067 Speaker Mute SP Mute ON/OFF OFF Refer to page 38.
Auto Power Off (page 16)
067 068 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff
OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/
120 (min.)
30 minutes
Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s
power is automatically turned off.
Battery (page 14)
068 069 Battery Type
Battery
Type
1 (Alkaline) / 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline)
Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instru-
ment.
Language (page 63)
069 070 Language Language English/Japanese English
Determines the language for the Song file names. Deter-
mines the language for the name of the files in the USB flash
drive or the files loaded from a computer.
• The settings of “MIDI” and “Audio” is useful when an external device such as a computer is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal
(page 36).
Function Number
Function Display Range/Settings
Default
Value
Description
PSR-
E453
PSR-
EW400
NOTE
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
62
Reference
USB Flash Drive Operations
By connecting the USB flash drive (sold separately) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal,
you can save the data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter
settings. The saved data can be recalled to this instrument again for the future use.
• You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable
enough to last through these crucial operations. When you try executing certain functions, the “UseAdpt” indication
may appear and the selected function cannot be executed.
IMPORTANT
Precautions when using the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal
This instrument features a built-in [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device
to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device
with care. Follow the important precautions below.
Compatible USB devices
USB flash drive
Other USB devices such as a USB hub, computer
keyboard or mouse cannot be used.
The instrument does not necessarily support all
commercially available USB devices. Yamaha can-
not guarantee operation of USB devices that you
purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use
with this instrument, please visit the following web
page:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on
this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or
loading from the USB device may differ depending
on the type of data or the status of the instrument.
Connecting a USB device
When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector
on the device is appropriate and that it is con-
nected in the proper direction.
Using a USB Flash Drive
By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive,
you can save data you’ve created to the connected
device, as well as read data from the connected
device.
Number of USB flash drives that can be
used
Only one USB flash drive can be connected to the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Formatting a USB flash drive
You should format the USB flash drive only with this
instrument (page 64). A USB flash drive formatted
on another device may not operate properly.
To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently
erased, apply the write-protect provided with each
USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB
flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect.
Turning off the instrument
When turning off the instrument, make sure that the
instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by
playback/recording or file management (such as
during Save, Delete and Format operations). Failure
to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the
data.
For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer
to the owner’s manual of the USB device.
The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of
5V/500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above
this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.
NOTE
NOTE
Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device while
executing playback/recording and file management opera-
tions (such as Save, Delete and Format), or when accessing
the USB device. Failure to observe this may result in “freez-
ing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the
USB device and the data.
When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and
vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the
two operations.
When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is
less than 3 meters. Do not connect an extension cable.
The format operation overwrites any previously existing
data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting
does not contain important data.
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTICE
USB Flash Drive Operations
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
63
Reference
Connecting a USB Flash Drive
1
Connect a USB flash drive to the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal, and wait until
“USB” appears on the left corner of the
display.
The “USB” indication confirms that the connected
USB flash drive has been mounted or recognized.
2
Hold down the [FUNCTION] button for
longer than a second to call up the File
Control display.
If “UnFormat” followed by “Format?”
appears:
This indicates that the connected USB flash
drive requires formatting. Execute the Format
operation by following the instructions starting
with step 2 on page 64.
3
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up the desired File Control function,
then execute it.
For details, refer to the table on the right.
File Control Display List
• Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions
when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 62.
• Messages may appear on the display during File Control pro-
cedures to aid in smooth operation. Refer to the Message List
on page 69 for details.
The File Control display cannot be called up in the follow-
ing situations.
• During playback of Style, Pattern, or Song
• When “USB” does not appear even if you have con-
nected a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-
minal.
• No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played
while the File Control display is showing, and only but-
tons related to File Control operations will be active.
NOTE
Mounting (flashes) Mounted (lights)
Load STY
Hold for longer
than a second.
NOTE
NOTE
Display File Control function Page
Load STY Loading a Style File 67
Load USR
Loading User Data from a
USB Flash Drive
66
Save SMF
Saving a User Song as SMF
to a USB Flash Drive
65
Save USR
Saving User Data to a USB
Flash Drive
64
Del SMF
Deleting a SMF File in a USB
Flash Drive
68
Del USR
Deleting a User File in a USB
Flash Drive
68
Format? Formatting a USB Flash Drive 64
Exit?
Exiting from a File Control
Display
69
• You can also exit from a File Control display only by
pressing the [FUNCTION] button.
Recognizable file location in the USB flash
drive for Song playback (page 28)
Song title display language
File names containing Japanese katakana characters
will be properly displayed if the instruments display lan-
guage is set to “Japanese.” All display information other
than file names will be displayed in English even if “Jap-
anese” is selected. For details, refer to page 61 Func-
tion 069 (PSR-E453)/Function 070 (PSR-EW400).
NOTE
• If you manage the Song files in the USB flash drive by
using a computer, etc., make sure to store the data
either in the USB flash drive's root directory or a first-
level/second-level folder in the root directory. Data
stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-
level folder cannot be selected and played by this
instrument.
IMPORTANT
Can be selected/
played.
Cannot be selected/
played.
USB flash drive (Root)
Song
File
Song
File
Song
File
Song
File
USB Flash Drive Operations
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
64
Reference
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
The Format operation lets you prepare commercially
available USB flash drive for use with this instrument.
1
Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer
than a second to call up the File Control
display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Format?.
3
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
4
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again or
the [+/YES] button to execute the Format
operation.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears, and the “USER FILES”
folder will be created in the USB flash drive.
5
Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit
from the File Control display.
Saving User Data to a USB Flash
Drive
The following data created on this instrument com-
prise the “User Data.
All 10 User Songs (page 32)
Styles which have been transferred from a com-
puter then loaded to Style numbers 221–230
(page 67).
All the Registration Memory settings (page 35)
The User Data can be saved as a single “User File
(.usr) to a USB flash drive.
1
Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer
than a second to call up the File Control
display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Save USR.
3
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.
As the target file name, “USER***” (***: number)
appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial
to select a different file name from “USER001”–
“USER100.
4
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
• The format operation overwrites any previously existing
data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting
does not contain important data.
• The Format operation cannot be cancelled during
execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the
USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may
result in data loss.
NOTICE
Format?
NOTICE
• The extension (.usr) of the User File will not be shown on the
display of this instrument. Confirm the extension on the com-
puter display when connecting the USB flash drive to a com-
puter.
Overwriting existing files
If a file that already contains data is selected as the
target user file, an overwrite confirmation message
will appear.
NOTE
Save USR
USER001
USB Flash Drive Operations
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
65
Reference
5
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+/YES] button to execute the Save
operation.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears, and a User file (.usr) will
be saved in a “USER FILES” folder which will
automatically be created on the USB flash drive.
6
Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit
from the File Control display.
Saving a User Song as SMF to a
USB Flash Drive
A User Song can be converted to SMF (Standard
MIDI File) format 0 and saved to a USB flash drive.
1
Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer
than a second to call up the File Control
display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Save SMF.
3
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.
As the target User Song, “USER**” (**: number
1–10) appears on the display. If desired, rotate
the dial to select a different User Song from
“USER01”–“USER10” then press the [0/EXE-
CUTE] button.
4
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
As the target file name on the USB flash drive,
“SONG***” (***: number 1–100) appears on the
display. If desired, rotate the dial to select the dif-
ferent file.
• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-
cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the
USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may
result in data loss.
• The amount of time required for this operation may vary
depending on the condition of the USB flash drive.
• If you want to recall the User file (.usr) to this instrument
again, execute the Load operation (page 66).
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTE
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format
With this format, various events via the keyboard per-
formance such as note on/off and Voice selection will
be recorded as MIDI data. The SMF Format 0 and For-
mat 1 are available. A large number of MIDI devices are
compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially
available Song files (MIDI files) are provided in SMF
Format 0.
• Patterns recorded to a User Song cannot be converted to
SMF.
• The DSP effect (page 48) cannot be converted to SMF format.
NOTE
Save SMF
User 1
SONG001
USB Flash Drive Operations
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
66
Reference
5
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
6
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+/YES] button to execute the Save
operation.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears, and a User Song will be
saved as the SMF format 0 in a “USER FILES”
folder which will automatically be created on the
USB flash drive.
7
Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit
from the File Control display.
Loading User Data from a USB
Flash Drive
A User data (page 64) saved as a User file (.usr) to
the USB flash drive can be loaded to this instrument.
1
Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer
than a second to call up the File Control
display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Load USR.
3
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.
“USER***” (***: number) appears on the display
as the User file name in the USB flash drive. As
desired, rotate the dial to select a different User
file.
4
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
5
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+/YES] button to execute the Load
operation.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears.
Overwriting existing files
If a file that already contains data is selected, an
overwrite confirmation message will appear.
• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-
cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the
USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may
result in data loss.
• The amount of time required for this operation may vary
depending on the condition of the USB flash drive.
• If a Pattern has been recorded to the User Song, the
Save operation cannot be executed by pressing the [0/
EXECUTE] button or the [+/YES] button, and “Can’tUse
appears on the display.
NOTICE
NOTE
• Loading a User file will overwrite and erase the existing
data, including all 10 User Songs, Style data loaded to the
Style numbers 221–230, and all the Registration Memory
settings. Save important data you want to keep to a sepa-
rate USB flash drive before loading a User file.
• Note that User files should be saved in the “USER FILES”
folder on the USB flash drive. Files saved outside this
folder cannot be recognized.
• The Load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-
cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the
USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may
result in data loss.
NOTICE
IMPORTANT
Load USR
USER001
NOTICE
USB Flash Drive Operations
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
67
Reference
6
Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit
from the File Control display.
7
Check the loaded data by calling up the
User Song, one of the Styles 221–230,
and Registration Memory settings.
Loading a Style File
Style data created on another instrument or a com-
puter can be loaded to the Style numbers 221–230,
and you can play them like the internal preset Styles.
The following two Load operations are available.
Loading of a Style file (.sty) saved on the root direc-
tory on the USB flash drive
Loading of a Style file (.sty) transferred from a com-
puter via the Musicsoft Downloader and stored in
the internal memory of this instrument
1
Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer
than a second to call up the File Control
display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Load STY.
3
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.
The name of a Style file in the USB flash drive or
internal memory of this instrument will appear on
the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a
different Style file.
4
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 221–
230) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the
dial to select a different number.
5
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
6
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+/YES] button to execute the Load
operation.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears.
7
Press the [STYLE] button, rotate the dial
to select a Style from 221–230, and then
try playing it back.
• For instructions on transferring a Style file from a computer via
the Musicsoft Downloader, refer to the online PDF manual
(page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” After data transfer,
load the Style data to one of the Style numbers 221–230 to
enable playback.
• Loading a Style file will overwrite and erase the existing
data of the destination number. Save important data you
want to keep to a separate USB flash drive before loading.
NOTE
NOTICE
Load STY
DiscoFox
USb
• The Load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-
cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the
USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may
result in data loss.
Load To?
221
NOTICE
USB Flash Drive Operations
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
68
Reference
Deleting a User File in the USB
Flash Drive
User Files (.usr) in the root directory of the USB flash
drive can be deleted.
1
Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer
than a second to call up the File Control
display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Del USR.
3
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.
User file names in the USB flash drive appear on
the display as “USER****” (****: number). If
desired, rotate the dial to select a different User
file.
4
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
5
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete
operation.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears.
6
Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit
from the File Control display.
Deleting an SMF File in the USB
Flash Drive
You can delete a SMF file that has been saved in the
USB flash drive via the Save SMF operation (page
65).
1
Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer
than a second to call up the File Control
display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Del SMF.
3
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.
SMF file names in the USB flash drive appear on
the display as “SONG****” (****: number).
If desired, rotate the dial to select a different SMF
file.
4
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
5
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete
operation.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears.
6
Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit
from the File Control display.
• Only User files (.usr) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on
the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder
cannot be recognized.
• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-
cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the
USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may
result in data loss.
IMPORTANT
Del USR
USER001
NOTICE
• Only SMF files (.mid) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on
the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder
cannot be recognized. This operation applies only to file
names with the “SONG***” (***: 001–100) format.
• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-
cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the
USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may
result in data loss.
IMPORTANT
Del SMF
SONG001
NOTICE
USB Flash Drive Operations
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
69
Reference
Exiting from a File Control
Display
To exit from the File Control display, press the
[FUNCTION], [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG] or [PAT-
TERN] button.
You can also exit from the File Control function mode
as follows:
1
Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to
call up “Exit?.
2
Press the [0/EXECUTE] button to exit
from the File Control display.
Message List
Exit?
Message Comment
Can’tUse
Indicates that the file control function is
currently unavailable since the USB flash
drive is being accessed.
Displayed when attempting to save a User
Song recorded Pattern as SMF format 0.
Complet.
Indicates the specified job completion such
as data saving and transmission.
Data Err
Displayed when the user song contains ille-
gal data.
Disk Ful
Displayed when saving data cannot be exe-
cuted since the memory becomes full.
Delete any unnecessary data or use another
USB flash drive.
Error
Displayed when a file error or operational
error occurs.
File Ful
Displayed when saving data cannot be exe-
cuted since the total number of files exceeds
the capacity.
Delete the unnecessary data or use another
USB flash drive.
no data There is no data in the memory.
no file There is no file in the memory.
Ovr
(Flashes)
Communication with the USB flash drive has
been shut down because of overcurrent to
the USB flash drive. Disconnect the USB
flash drive from the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-
minal, then turn on the power of the instru-
ment.
Protect
Displayed when trying to save or delete data
on a protected USB flash drive, or formatting
a protected USB flash drive. Set protect to
off and try again.
UnFormat
Displayed when connecting an unformatted
USB flash drive.
UseAdpt
USB flash drive save, delete, and format
operations cannot be performed when the
instrument is being powered from battery.
Use an AC adaptor.
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
70
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Refer to the “Message List” on page 69 as required.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical
power.
When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off
suddenly and unexpectedly.
This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used,
power may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-
duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it
further away from the instrument
The instrument is automatically turned off even if no
operation is done.
This is normal. This occurs due to the Auto Power Off function (page
16).
The volume is too soft.
The sound quality is poor.
• The Style/Pattern/Song/Arpeggio stops unexpectedly
or will not play.
The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-
rectly.
The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel
settings are reset.
The instrument turns off when a USB flash drive is
connected.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely
new ones or completely recharged ones, or use the AC adaptor.
No sound is produced even when the keyboard is
played, or a Song, Style, or Pattern is being played
back.
Check whether a set of headphones or an audio cable is connected to
the [PHONES/OUTPUT], or not. When such a connection is made, no
sound is output from the speaker of this instrument.
(PSR-EW400) Check the on/off status of the Speaker Mute setting
(page 38). Make sure to set to OFF.
Check the on/off status of the Local Control (page 61). Normally, set
this parameter to ON.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the
opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch
cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-
switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning
on the power.
No sound is produced even when playing keys in the
right hand area of the keyboard, although chords
played in the left hand area are recognized.
Check whether or not the Dictionary function (page 55) is used. When
used, this is normal.
Not all of the Voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off, when playing the keyboard,
Arpeggio, Style or Pattern or Song.
You have exceeded 48 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum
polyphony (the maximum amount of notes that can be played simulta-
neously) of this instrument. If the Main, Dual, and Split Voices are
being used along with playback of Arpeggio, Style, Pattern or Song,
some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”).
The sound of the Voice changes from note to note.
This is normal. The tone generation method uses multiple recordings
(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the
actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from note to note.
The keyboard performance and playback of Style/Pat-
tern/Song produces an unexpected or inappropriate
sound, and cannot be restored to the normal status.
Using the Knobs can produce dramatic changes in the sound, but may
also produce unexpected or undesired sounds. If you want to restore the
original, normal sound before being changed by the Knobs, press the
[DSP] button to turn DSP off, change the Voice, Style, Pattern or Song,
or press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the panel settings.
The Style, Pattern or Song does not start even when
the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Arpeggio
does not start even when the note is pressed with the
Arpeggio turned on.
Check the on/off status of the External Clock (page 61). Normally, set
this parameter to OFF.
The volume of the Style, Pattern or Song is too low. Check the volume setting in the Functions (pages 53 and 57).
The chords played in the left hand area cannot be rec-
ognized even when ACMP is turned on.
Check the Split Point setting (page 53). Set this to an appropriate
value.
Style parts other than the Rhythm part produce no
sound.
Check the on/off status of the ACMP (page 26). Make sure to turn
ACMP on.
The ACMP indicator does not appear on the display
when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Check the on/off status of the [STYLE] lamp. When using a Style,
press the [STYLE] button to turn on the [STYLE] lamp.
Appendix
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
71
Appendix
Specifications
PSR-E453 PSR-EW400
Product Name Digital Keyboard
Size/Weight
Dimensions (W x D x H)
946 mm x 405 mm x 140 mm
(37-1/4” x 15-15/16” x 5-1/2”)
1178 mm x 412 mm x 138 mm
(46-3/8” x 16-1/4” x 5-7/16”)
Weight
6.6 kg (14 lbs 9 oz.)
(not including batteries)
8.4 kg (18 lbs 8 oz.)
(not including batteries)
Control Interface
Keyboard
Number of Keys 61 76
Touch Response Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed
Other
Controllers
Pitch Bend
Wheel
Ye s
Knobs Yes
Display
Type LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Language English
Panel Language English
Voices
Tone
Generation
Tone Generation
Technology
AWM Stereo Sampling
Polyphony 48
Preset
Number of
Voices
237 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits +
40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices
Live! Grand Piano +
236 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits +
40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices
Compatibility GM, XGlite
Effects
Types
Reverb 9 types
Chorus 5 types
Master EQ 6 types
Harmony 26 types
DSP 10 types
Functions
Dual Yes
Split Yes
Arpeggio 150 types
Melody
Suppressor
Ye s
Accompaniment
Styles
Preset
Number of
Styles
220
Fingering Multi finger
Style Control
ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, SYNC STOP, START/STOP,
INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL, TRACK ON/OFF
External Styles 10
Other Features
Music Database 378
One Touch
Setting (OTS)
Ye s
Compatibility Style File Format (SFF)
Patterns Preset
Number of
Patterns
25
Number of
Sections
5
Songs (MIDI)
Preset
Number of
Preset Songs
30
Recording
Number of
Songs
10
Number of
Tra ck s
6 (5 Melody + 1 Style/Pattern)
Data Capacity Approx. 19,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded)
Format
Playback SMF (Formats 0 & 1)
Recording Original File Format (SMF 0 conversion function)
Functions
Lesson/Guide Lesson 1 – 3 (Listening, Timing, Waiting), Repeat & Learn, Chord Dictionary
USB Audio (USB TO HOST) 44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo
Registration
Memory
Number of
Buttons
4 (x 8 banks)
Ov
erall Controls
Metronome Yes
Tempo Range 11 – 280
Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12
Tuning 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments)
Scale Type 5 types
Miscellaneous PIANO Button Yes (Portable Grand Button)
Storage and
Connectivity
Storage
Internal Memory Approx. 1.29 MB
External Drives USB flash drive
Connectivity
USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE,
DC IN 12V, Headphones/Output,
Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini)
USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE,
DC IN 16V, Headphones,
Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini),
OUTPUT (L/L+R, R)
Amplifiers/
Speakers
Amplifiers
6 W + 6 W
(When using PA-150 AC adaptor)
12 W + 12 W
(When using PA-300C AC adaptor)
Speakers 12 cm x 2
Specifications
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
72
Appendix
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then
download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your
Yamaha dealer.
Power Supply
Power Supply
Adaptor
PA-150 or
an equivalent recommended by Yamaha
PA-300C or
an equivalent recommended by Yamaha
Batteries
Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6),
manganese (R6) or
Ni-MH rechargeable batteries
Six “D” size alkaline (LR20),
manganese (R20) or
Ni-MH rechargeable batteries
Power Consumption
8 W
(When using PA-150 AC adaptor)
11 W
(When using PA-300C AC adaptor)
Auto Power Off Yes
Included Accessories
• Owner’s Manual
• Data List
• AC adaptor* (PA-150 or an equivalent
recommended by Yamaha)
* May not be included depending on your area.
Check with your Yamaha dealer.
•Music Rest
• Online Member Product Registration
• Owner’s Manual
• Data List
• AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent
recommended by Yamaha), power cord*
* May not be included depending on your area.
Check with your Yamaha dealer.
•Music Rest
• Online Member Product Registration
Separately Sold Accessories
(May not be available depending on your area.)
• AC adaptor: PA-150 or an equivalent
recommended by Yamaha
• Keyboard Stand: L-2C
• Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/
HPH-50
• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5
• Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01
• AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent
recommended by Yamaha
• Keyboard Stand: L-6
• Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/
HPH-50
• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5
• Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
73
Appendix
Index
A
A-B Repeat ................................29
AC Adaptor ................................14
Accessories ...............................10
ACMP ........................................26
Arpeggio ..............................24, 49
Arpeggio Quantize ....................49
Arpeggio Type ...........................24
Arpeggio Velocity ......................60
Attack ..................................46, 59
Audio Device .............................36
Audio Loop Back .......................60
Auto Accompaniment ................26
Auto Accompaniment area ........26
Auto Power Off ....................16, 61
AUX IN ......................................36
B
Backup ......................................39
Backup Clear .............................39
Base Note .................................43
Battery .......................................14
Battery Type ........................15, 61
BGM (Background Music) .........56
C
Chord Dictionary .......................55
Chord Type ................................54
Chorus ................................46, 59
Chorus Type ..............................40
Computer ..................................36
Computer-related Operations .... 11
Connection ................................36
Cutoff ...................................46, 59
D
Data List .................................... 11
Del SMF ....................................68
Del USR ....................................68
Demo Song ...............................28
Display ......................................19
DSP ..................................... 47, 48
DSP Part ...................................48
DSP Type ..................................48
Dual Voice ...........................21, 45
E
EG (Envelope Generator) ......... 46
Ending .......................................50
EQ (Equalizer) ..........................42
External Clock ........................... 60
F
Fast Forward .............................29
Fast Reverse ............................. 29
File Control Display ................... 63
Fill .............................................50
Filter ....................................46, 59
Fine Tuning ............................... 41
Flash Clear ............................... 39
Footswitch ............................17, 49
Formatting .................................64
Function ....................................58
H
Harmony ................................... 23
Harmony Type ........................... 60
Headphones ............................. 16
I
Initial Send ................................ 60
Initialization ............................... 39
Intro ...........................................50
iPhone/iPad ...............................37
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
.............................................. 11
K
Keyboard Out ............................ 60
Keyboard Stand ........................ 17
Knob ...................................25, 46
L
Language ..................................61
Lesson ................................ 30, 61
Load STY ..................................67
Load USR .................................65
Local Control ............................. 60
M
Main ..........................................50
Main Voice ................................20
Master Volume .......................... 16
Melody Suppressor ..............37, 59
Melody Voice ............................57
Message List ............................ 69
Metronome ............................... 22
MIDI .......................................... 60
MIDI Basics ...............................11
MIDI Reference ..........................11
Music Database ........................ 26
Music Rest ................................ 10
O
Octave ...................................... 59
One Touch Setting (OTS) ......... 41
Output ....................................... 38
P
Pan ........................................... 59
Pattern .................................27, 50
Pattern Retrigger .................47, 52
Pause ....................................... 29
Pedal ................................... 17, 49
Pitch ......................................... 41
Pitch Bend Range .................... 58
Power ........................................ 16
R
Random .................................... 56
Recording ................................. 32
Registration Memory ................ 35
Release .............................. 46, 59
Repeat ................................ 29, 31
Resonance ......................... 46, 59
Retrigger Rate .......................... 47
Reverb ................................ 46, 59
Reverb Type .............................. 40
S
Save SMF ................................. 65
Save USR ................................. 64
Scale ........................................ 43
Section ............................... 50, 52
Song ................................... 28, 56
Song Book .................................11
Song Out .................................. 60
Speaker .............................. 16, 38
Specifications ........................... 71
Split Point ................................. 53
Split Voice ........................... 21, 45
Stop Accompaniment ............... 53
Style ................................... 26, 50
Style Out ................................... 60
Sustain ..................................... 17
Synchro Stop ............................ 51
Index
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
74
Appendix
T
Tap Start ..............................52, 57
Tempo ...........................22, 52, 57
Time Signature ..........................22
Touch Response .......................42
Track ..............................29, 32, 51
Transpose ..................................41
Troubleshooting .........................70
Tuning ........................................44
U
USB Flash Drive ........................62
USB TO DEVICE ......................62
USB TO HOST ..........................36
V
Voice ...................................20, 45
Volume ......................................16
Volume (AUX IN) .......................58
Volume (Harmony) ....................60
Volume (Metronome) .................22
Volume (Pattern) .......................53
Volume (Song) ..........................57
Volume (Style) ...........................53
Volume (USB TO HOST) ...........58
Volume (Voice) ..........................59
Volume Balance ........................46
Y
Your Tempo ...............................61
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
75
MEMO
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
76
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with
your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human
health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service
or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the
correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical
involved.
(weee_battery_eu_en_01)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også
selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
Entsorgung leerer Batterien
(nur innerhalb Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien
oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei
einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben
werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(battery)
PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual
77
LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON
PORTABLE KEYBOARDS
(NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)
Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free
performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every
Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the
Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s
authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted
Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or
Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.
Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or
otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or
materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If
Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or
removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay
the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)
damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to
follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the
carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been
altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)
deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)
damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/
noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of
alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original
Owner and is not transferable.
In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted
Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact
Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local
authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer
has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website
at www.Yamaha.com
. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of
the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase
document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found
ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon
receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.
Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER
EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.
YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT
YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to
state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to
assume for it any other express warranty.
If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:
CUSTOMER SERVICE
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373
Telephone: 800-854-1569
www.yamaha.com
Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,
Canada
Tel: +1-416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: +1-714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José
Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,
D.F., C.P. 03900
Tel: +52-55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –
Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,
Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,
Madero Este-C1107CEK,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: +54-11-4119-7000
VENEZUELA
Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.
AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,
Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela
Tel: +58-212-943-1877
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,
P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, U.K.
Tel: +44-1908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: +41-44-3878080
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/
ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: +48-22-880-08-88
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: +359-2-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta
Tel: +356-2133-2093
NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/
LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: +31-347-358040
FRANCE
Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: +33-1-6461-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: +39-02-93577-1
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231
Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain
Tel: +34-91-639-88-88
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,
Greece
Tel: +30-210-6686260
SWEDEN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: +46-31-89-34-00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Denmark,
Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland
Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark
Tel: +45-44-92-49-00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Antaksentie 4
FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland
Tel: +358 (0)96185111
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -
Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway
Tel: +47-6716-7800
ICELAND
Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.
Sidumula 20
IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: +354-525-5050
CROATIA
Euro Unit D.O.O.
Slakovec 73
40305 Nedelisce
Tel: +38540829400
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.
Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,
Moscow, 121059, Russia
Tel: +7-495-626-5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
Yama h a M u sic G u l f F Z E
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
TURKEY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi
Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz
Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey
Tel: +90-212-999-8010
CYPRUS
Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.
Nikis Ave 2k
1086 Nicosia
Tel: + 357-22-511080
Major Music Center
21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy
P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel: (392) 227 9213
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yama h a M u sic G u l f FZ E
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-400-051-7700
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: +852-2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Private Limited
Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,
Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,
Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: +62-21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: +60-3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited
Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: +65-6740-9200
TAIWAN
Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.
2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.
New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: +886-2-7741-8888
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: +66-2215-2622
VIETNAM
Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited
15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach
Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,
Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel: +84-8-3818-1122
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
http://asia.yamaha.com
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
VIC 3006, Australia
Tel: +61-3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: +64-9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
http://asia.yamaha.com
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
DMI14
Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan
(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
ZT18040
Manual Development Department
© 2016 Yamaha Corporation
Published 03/2016 POAP-A0
Printed in China
Yamaha Global Site
http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/

Documenttranscriptie

Setting Up DIGITAL KEYBOARD Appendix Reference Quick Guide Owner’s Manual Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5–7. EN For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Serial No. Purchase Date ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual (FCC DoC) For AC adaptor and PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 3 For AC adaptor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (fcc_sengen_C) CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (can_b_01) Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) 4 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 72) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. DMI-5 1/3 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 5 • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Battery • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - Use the specified battery type (page 72) only. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. DMI-5 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections Location 6 • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. 2/3 • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Handling caution Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. DMI-5 3/3 NOTICE Information To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.  Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.  Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Some of the data of this instrument (page 39) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto USB flash drive/an external device such as a computer (pages 36, 64). Before using a USB flash drive, make sure to refer to page 62. • To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto spare USB flash drive or an external device such as a computer as backup data.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs and the songs that can be downloaded from the Yamaha website have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 7 Table of Contents Setting Up Special Features ..............................................................8 Compatible Format and Functions .................................10 Included Accessories .....................................................10 About the Manuals .........................................................11 Setting Up Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Setting Up 14 Power Requirements......................................................14 Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................16 Adjusting the Master Volume .........................................16 Connecting Headphones or an External Device ............16 Using a Pedal (Sustain) .................................................17 Using a Keyboard Stand ................................................17 Quick Guide Quick Guide Basic Operation and Display Items 18 Basic Operation..............................................................18 Display Items..................................................................19 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 20 Selecting a Main Voice...................................................20 Playing the “Grand Piano” ..............................................20 Layering a Dual Voice ....................................................21 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................21 Using the Metronome .....................................................22 Adding Harmony ............................................................23 Creating Arpeggios 24 Triggering Arpeggios ......................................................24 Changing the Arpeggio Type .........................................24 Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs 25 Assigning Functions to the Knobs ..................................25 Using the Knobs .............................................................25 Playing Styles 26 Using the Music Database .............................................26 Playing with Patterns Like a DJ! 27 Playing Songs 28 Listening to a Demo Song..............................................28 Selecting and Playing Back a Song ...............................28 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............29 Playing a Specified Section of a Song Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) ..............................................................29 Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................29 Using the Song Lesson Feature 30 Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn ....................31 Recording Your Performance 32 Track Structure of a Song ..............................................32 Quick Recording ............................................................32 Recording to a Specified Track ......................................33 Clearing a User Song.....................................................34 Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song................34 Memorizing Your Favorite Settings (Registration Memory) 35 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory...35 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ..35 Connecting to Other Devices 36 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers....................................................................36 Connecting to a Computer .............................................36 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad .......................................37 Using the Melody Suppressor ........................................37 Using an External Stereo System for Playback (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400)...............38 Speaker Mute On/Off Setting (PSR-EW400) .................38 Backup and Initialization 39 Backup Parameters .......................................................39 Initializing the Instrument ...............................................39 Reference Special Features Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 20 Appendix The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. 8 Arpeggio Function Page 24 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Play Audio via an External Device Page 36 By connecting an external audio device such as an iPhone/iPad or a device such as a computer, you can play the audio sound of that external device through this instrument. 40 Selecting a Reverb Type ................................................40 Selecting a Chorus Type ................................................40 Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................41 Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning ..........................................41 Pitch Controls—the [PITCH BEND] wheel .....................41 Calling Up Optimum Panel Settings—One Touch Setting (OTS) .............................................................41 Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard ...........42 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................42 Scale Tuning 43 Selecting a Scale ...........................................................43 Setting the Base Note for Each Scale ............................43 Tuning Each Note to Create an Original Scale ..............44 Voice Settings 45 Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................45 Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................45 Voice Editing ..................................................................45 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs 46 Adding DSP Effects........................................................48 Arpeggio Settings 49 Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Pattern Playback—Arpeggio Quantize ...................................49 Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch ........49 Style and Pattern Settings 50 56 BGM (Background Music) Playback ..............................56 Random Song Playback ................................................56 Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................57 Tap Start ........................................................................57 Song Volume .................................................................57 Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song ......................57 The Functions 58 Basic Procedure in the Function Display .......................58 USB Flash Drive Operations 62 Connecting a USB Flash Drive ......................................63 Formatting a USB Flash Drive .......................................64 Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive ........................64 Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive .......65 Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive ..................66 Loading a Style File .......................................................67 Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Drive ..................68 Deleting an SMF File in the USB Flash Drive ................68 Exiting from a File Control Display .................................69 Message List ..................................................................69 Appendix Troubleshooting ............................................................. 70 Specifications................................................................. 71 Index .............................................................................. 73 Reference Style Variations—Sections .............................................50 Style Synchro Stop.........................................................51 Turning Each Style Track On/Off ...................................51 Pattern Variations—Sections .........................................52 Pattern Retrigger Function .............................................52 Changing the Tempo......................................................52 Tap Start ........................................................................52 Song Settings Setting Up Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Pattern .................53 Setting the Split Point.....................................................53 Playing Chords Without Style Playback (Stop Accompaniment) ..............................................53 Chord Types for Style Playback.....................................54 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............55 Quick Guide Reference Page 26 The auto-accompaniment Styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of music genres. Select a Style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new Styles to expand your musical horizons. Create New Sounds Page 25 By simply adjusting two knobs you can enhance the sound of your performance with dynamic effect processing, such as adding distortion or applying luscious reverb. The functions that can be assigned to the knobs include filter, DSP effect, etc. Try playing like a DJ by using the Patterns! Page 27 The Pattern function lets you perform like a DJ. Use the Track Control to try out various instrument combinations, and play with the Knobs to create various new sounds. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Appendix Play Along with Styles 9 Compatible Format and Functions Setting Up GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). STYLE FILE FORMAT (SFF) The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • Data List • AC adaptor*1 • Power cord (PSR-EW400) • Music rest • Online Member Product Registration*2 *1:May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2:The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Attaching the Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. 10 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual About the Manuals Setting Up This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials. NOTE • The illustrations and displays as shown in this manual are based on the PSR-E453. • Please note that the PSR-EW400 and PSR-E453 have different numbers of keys: the PSR-EW400 has 76 keys, and the PSR-E453 has 61 keys.  Included Documents Owner’s Manual (this book) • Setting Up Please read this section first. • Quick Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions. • Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of the instrument. • Appendix This section includes troubleshooting and specifications. Data List Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, Patterns and Effects.  Online Materials (PDF) MIDI Reference Contains MIDI-related information for this instrument. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about MIDI. Computer-related Operations Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transmitting/receiving the data. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for searching the desired files. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Downloading the Song Book/Song Data Song Book (only in English, French, German, Spanish and Japanese) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument and the optional Songs. Song Data Contains the data of 70 Songs that can be played back with this instrument and/or used for the Song Lesson (page 30). After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download the Song Book and the Song Data free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. NOTE • The downloaded Song data can be played back by transferring data from the computer to the instrument or saving data to the USB flash drive (page 28). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up Front Panel The illustration is of the PSR-E453. Setting Up Dial (page 18) e r t y u i o !0 !4 !5 q w !1 !3 !6 !8 !7 !9 @0 @1 !2 Display (page 19) • Voice List (Data List) • Style List (Data List) • Song List (Data List) • Pattern List (Data List) @5 @4 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) @2 12 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 072 (C4) 084 (C5) As illustrated, each note of the keyboard has a specific note number and name (e.g., 036/C1), which is used in making various settings, such as Split Point (page 53). PSR-E453: 036 (C1) – 096 (C6) PSR-EW400: 028 (E0) – 103 (G6) 096 (C6) @3 Panel Controls and Terminals !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 [ ] (Standby/On) switch ....................Page 16 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................Page 16 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............Page 20 [DEMO] button......................................Page 28 [TRANSPOSE] button ..........................Page 41 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........Page 37 [LESSON] button..................................Page 30 [REC] button .........................................Page 32 [METRONOME] button.........................Page 22 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................Page 52 VOICE CONTROL section [SPLIT] button ...................................Page 21 [DUAL] button ...................................Page 21 [HARMONY] button ..........................Page 23 [ARPEGGIO] button..........................Page 24 LIVE CONTROL section [ASSIGN] button ...............................Page 25 [A] and [B] knobs .............................Page 25 [DSP] button......................................Page 48 CATEGORY buttons .............................Page 18 [FUNCTION] button ..............................Page 58 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................Page 26 Number buttons [1]–[9], [-/NO], [0/EXECUTE] and [+/YES] buttons .....Page 18 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [BANK/MEMORY] buttons................Page 35 [1]–[4] buttons...................................Page 35 [PATTERN] button ................................Page 27 [SONG] button ......................................Page 28 [STYLE] button .....................................Page 26 [VOICE] button .....................................Page 20 PATTERN/SONG/STYLE Control buttons •When the [PATTERN] lamp is on: ................................Pages 27 and 52 •When the [SONG] lamp is on: ..............................................Page 29 •When the [STYLE] lamp is on: .........................Pages 26, 50, and 51 @3 TRACK CONTROL buttons •When the [PATTERN] lamp is on: ..............................................Page 27 •When the [SONG] lamp is on: ......................................Pages 29, 32 Rear Panel PSR-E453 Setting Up q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1 PSR-EW400 @6 @7 #0 @8 @9 #1 @6 OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks (PSR-EW400) ..............................................Page 38 @7 [SUSTAIN] jack ..................................... Page 17 @8 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack (PSR-E453), [PHONES] jack (PSR-EW400) .............Page 16 @9 [AUX IN] jack ........................................Page 36 #0 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal .................Page 62 [USB TO HOST] terminal .....................Page 36 #1 DC IN jack ............................................. Page 14 •When the [STYLE] lamp is on: ..............................................Page 51 @4 [PITCH BEND] wheel ...........................Page 41 @5 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit ....Page 20 These indicate the drum or percussion instrument assigned to the corresponding keys (in the case of “Standard Kit 1,” shown in the Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 13 Setting Up Power Requirements Plug Setting Up Although the instrument will run either from an AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. NOTICE Slide the plug as indicated. The shape of the plug differs depending on your area. CAUTION • You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable enough to last through these crucial operations. Using an AC Adaptor • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn the power off and disconnect the plug from the outlet. NOTE • Follow this procedure in reverse order when disconnecting the AC adaptor. Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the illustration. PSR-E453 Using Batteries 1 This instrument requires the following batteries. • PSR-E453: Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. • PSR-EW400: Six “D” size alkaline (LR20), manganese (R20) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. DC IN jack (page 13) AC adaptor 2 The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance. AC outlet PSR-EW400 NOTICE 2 DC IN jack (page 13) • When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. 3 AC Outlet AC adaptor the instrument’s bottom panel. 1 PSR-E453 Power cord The shape of the plug differs depending on your area. WARNING • Use the specified AC adaptor (page 72) only. Using the wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. WARNING • When using the AC adaptor with a removable plug, make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire. • Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug. 14 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off. 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Setting Up PSR-EW400 NOTE Setting Up • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument.  Setting the battery type 3 Insert the six new batteries, putting them in the correct direction according to the illustration. PSR-E453 Depending on the battery type to be used, you may need to change the battery type setting on this instrument. To change the setting, first turn on the power to the instrument, then choose the battery type you would like to use. Alkaline (and manganese) batteries are chosen by default. For details, refer to page 61, Function 068 (PSR-E453)/Function 069 (PSREW400). NOTICE • Failure to set the battery type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the battery type correctly.  Checking the power status You can confirm the power source at the left corner of the display. Only one of these is shown. GrandPno PSR-EW400 : The power is supplied from the AC adaptor. : The power is supplied from the batteries. NOTE • When the AC adaptor is plugged in to the AC outlet, the battery icon does not appear even when batteries are inserted. In this case, the power is supplied from the AC adaptor. 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. • Make sure to set the battery type correctly (page 15). • When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or alreadyrecharged ones. Remaining battery power indication Indicates that the power will be turned off immediately. When rechargeable batteries are used, this icon flashes before the power is turned off. Indicates that remaining power is insufficient for operation. Before the power runs out, replace all the batteries with new ones, or fully recharged ones (when using rechargeable types). Note that the instrument may not work properly, including unusually soft volume and poor sound quality when remaining power becomes low. Indicates that the remaining power is sufficient. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 15 Setting Up Turning the Power On/Off Setting Up 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] control to “MIN”. 1 2 NOTICE • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. NOTE 2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Adjust the volume as desired while playing the keyboard. 3 Press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for about a second to turn the power off. CAUTION • Even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the wall AC outlet. • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off. For details, see page 39. Adjusting the Master Volume To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound, use the [MASTER VOLUME] control while playing the keyboard. NOTICE • Press only the [ ] (Standby/On) switch when turning the power on. Any other operations such as pressing keys, buttons or the pedal are not allowed. Doing so may cause the instrument to malfunction. CAUTION • Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. Setting the Auto Power Off function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off is 30 minutes by default; however, you can change the setting. For details, refer to page 61, Function 067 (PSR-E453)/Function 068 (PSREW400).  Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method) Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key on the keyboard. Then the instrument starts up with the Auto Power Off function disabled. Connecting Headphones or an External Device Standard stereo phone plug  Connecting Headphones PSR-E453 Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES/ OUTPUT]/[PHONES] jack on the rear panel. The built-in speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The lowest key  Connecting an External Device PSR-EW400 16 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual • PSR-E453: This jack also functions as an external output. By connecting to a computer, keyboard amplifier, recorder, or other audio device, you can Setting Up • PSR-EW400: When connecting an external speaker, refer to page 38. CAUTION • Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the components or electrical shock may occur. NOTICE • To avoid possible damage to the external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. When turning off the power, do so in reverse order: first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Using a Keyboard Stand The following keyboard stands (sold separately) can be used. • PSR-E453: L-2C • PSR-EW400: L-6 Setting Up output the audio signal of this instrument to that external device. The speakers of this instrument are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. When using L-6 Keyboard Stand (PSR-EW400) The exterior size of PSR-EW400 is beyond the limits as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for the instrument. When setting the instrument, place it on the center of the stand as shown in the illustration. Make sure that the bottom of the instrument firmly rests on the stoppers. Using a Pedal (Sustain) Place the instrument so that the left and right parts of the stand are inside the protrusions on the bottom panel of the instrument. CAUTION You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch (FC5 or FC4A; sold separately) plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally slip down. This could cause physical injury to you or others, as well as damage to the instrument or other property. NOTE • Plug or unplug the footswitch while the power is off. Also, do not press the footswitch when turning the power on. Doing so changes the polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed operation. • The sustain function does not affect Split Voices (page 21). • Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the footswitch is held. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 17 Basic Operation and Display Items Quick Guide Basic Operation This instrument features four basic functions: Voice, Style, Pattern and Song. To use this instrument, select a basic function first, and then make various settings. 3 2 Start a function or play the keyboard. Quick Guide Number buttons [0]–[9] Select a basic function. Dial Use these buttons to directly enter the desired Style/Voice number etc, or a parameter value. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Bright Piano. 1 Select an item or value. Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Decrease Increase Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons Press the [+/YES] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-/NO] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press Pressing both buttons simultane- briefly to ously lets you reset a parameter decrease. to the default value. CATEGORY [+], [-] buttons Press briefly to increase. When selecting a Voice, Style, Pattern, Song, etc., you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. These buttons can also be used to select function items sequentially after pressing the [FUNCTION] button. Jumps to the first item in the previous category. Jumps to the first item in the next category. Depending on the basic function selected in step 1, you can use the different functions as printed on the panel. Song functions are printed above the buttons, Pattern functions are printed further above, and Style functions are printed below. The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function calls up. 18 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual In most procedures described throughout this manual, the dial is used for selecting items or changing values. Note however, that in most cases in which the dial can be used to change values, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons can also be used. Basic Operation and Display Items Display Items The display shows all the current settings of the Song, Style Pattern, Voice and other related functions. Power source status USB connection status Appears when USB flash drive is connected to this instrument (page 63). Notation Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. The illustration is of the PSR-E453. GrandPno 001 On/off status This area indicates the on/off status of each function. Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. page 21 001 Beat Indicates the current beat of playback (page 28). Knob assignment Indicates the parameters currently assigned to the knobs (page 25). page 21 page 23 page 24 page 48 page 43 page 42 page 26 page 51 FUNCTION and MEASURE Indicates the Function number when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, or the current Measure number during playback of a Song, Style or Pattern. 001 Chord Indicates the chord which is being played in the Auto Accompaniment range (page 26) or specified via Song playback. Track status Indicates the on/off status of the current Song, Style or Pattern (pages 27, 29, 32, 51). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 19 Quick Guide Indicates the source from which this instrument obtains power, AC adaptor or batteries (page 15). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices This instrument features various instrumental Voices including piano. Not only can you play just one single Voice (Main Voice), but you can also layer a different Voice (Dual Voice) to the Main Voice, or play a different Voice (Split Voice) in the left-hand area of the keyboard from the right-hand area. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. For a list of available Voices, refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List. Playing the “Grand Piano” When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Voice name Quick Guide GrandPno 001 Voice number Appears when the [VOICE] button is on. NOTE • Voice number 001 on the PSR-EW400 is “Live! Grand Piano.” 2 Use the dial to select the desired Voice. Flute 137 3 Play the keyboard. Preset Voice Types 20 001–237 Instrument Voices. 238–261 (Drum/SFX Kit) Various drum/percussion or SFX sounds are assigned to individual keys. Details on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List. 262–301 Used for Arpeggio performance (page 24). 302–758 XGlite Voices. 000 Selecting this automatically calls up the most suitable Voice and panel setups for the current Style, Song or Pattern. This function is called OTS (page 41). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual The Voice for the entire keyboard will be set to 001 “Grand Piano” (PSR-E453)/ or “Live! Grand Piano” (PSR-EW400). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Layering a Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. Appears when Dual is on Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split on. Appears when Split is on 2 Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. Quick Guide The keyboard is divided into left and right hand area at the Split Point. You can play a Split Voice on the left hand area while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the right hand area of the keyboard. Two Voices will sound at the same time. Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2) Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can also select a different Dual Voice (page 45). 036 (C1) 048 (C2) Split Voice 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice (and Dual Voice) The Split Voice (page 45) and the Split Point can be changed as desired (page 53). 2 Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 21 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Using the Metronome 2 A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while a click sounds the other beats. If “0” is selected, a click sounds for all beats with no chime accent. Select 6 for this example. This instrument features a built-in metronome which can be used when practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. NOTE • This parameter cannot be set during playback of a Style, Song or Pattern. 3 2 Rotate the dial to select the number of beats per measure. Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to call up “TimeSigD” (Time Signature Denominator). The length of one beat is shown on the display. Quick Guide TimeSigD Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 08 This operation lets you adjust not only the metronome tempo, but also the tempo of Style, Song and Pattern. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up “Tempo.” The current tempo is shown on the display. Tempo The length of one beat. 4 Rotate the dial to select the length of one beat, from 2nd, 4th, 8th and 16th note. Select “08” (8th note) for this example. 5 Confirm the setting by playing the Metronome. 090 Current tempo 2 Adjust the tempo by rotating the dial. Setting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “MtrVol” (Function 061). Setting the Time Signature Here, we’ll set a time signature of 6/8 as an example. 1 Hold down the [METRONOME] button for longer than a second to call up “TimeSigN” (Time Signature Numerator). MtrVol 100 The number of beats per measure is shown on the display. TimeSigN Hold for longer than a second. 22 06 Number of beats per measure. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 061 Metronome volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the volume. Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony Playing each Harmony Type You can add effects such as Harmony, Tremolo and Echo to the Main Voice. For a list of the effects, refer to the Harmony Type List in the separate Data List. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on. • Harmony type 01 to 05 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard when ACMP is on (page 26). • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Appears when the Harmony is on. 2 Hold down the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second until “HarmType” (Function 042) appears on the display. After a few seconds, the current Harmony type appears. HarmType Hold down two keys. Quick Guide Although turning on the Harmony will select a Harmony type suitable for the current Main Voice, you can select a different Harmony type as described in the following steps. • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) Play the keys. 042 Hold for longer than a second. Adjusting the Harmony Volume You can adjust the Harmony volume in the Function Settings (page 60, Function 043). Trio 02 042 Current Harmony type 3 Rotate the dial to select the desired Harmony type. The operation differs depending on the Harmony type. Try playing the keyboard by referring to “How to sound each Harmony Type” at right, and the Harmony Type List. 4 Press the [HARMONY] button again to turn Harmony off. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 23 Creating Arpeggios The Arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing the notes of the chord. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music production as well as performance. Triggering Arpeggios 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn on the Arpeggio function. Appears when the Arpeggio is on. Changing the Arpeggio Type The most suitable Arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a Main Voice, but you can also select any other Arpeggio type. For a list of available Arpeggios, refer to the Arpeggio List in the separate Data List. Quick Guide 1 NOTE After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio type appears. • Selecting a Voice number between 262 and 301 will turn on Arpeggio automatically. 2 Hold down the [ARPEGGIO] button for longer than a second to call up “ARP Type” (Function 044). ARP Type Press a note or notes to trigger Arpeggio. 044 The Arpeggio phrase differs depending on the number of pressed notes and the area of the keyboard. Hold for longer than a second. SynArp1 004 044 Current Arpeggio type When Split (page 21) is on, Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice. When Split is off, Arpeggio is applied to the Main and Dual Voices. Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/Dual Voices simultaneously. NOTE • Selecting a Voice number between 292 and 301 will turn on Split automatically, as well as Arpeggio. When one of those Voices is selected, Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice and is triggered only by playing a key to the left of the Split Point. • By assigning the Arpeggio Hold function to the footswitch, the Arpeggio will continue to play after the note is released (page 49). 3 24 To turn off the Arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO] button again. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Arpeggio type. NOTE • When playing one of the Arpeggio types 117 to 150, select a Drum Kit (Voice No.238–261) as the Main Voice. Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs The two knobs can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Select the desired pre-programmed function combination printed above the knobs, then rotate the knobs, to enjoy the sound. Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially assign the function combinations provided: (1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (1) … etc. The current combination is shown in the display. GrandPno Using the Knobs Here is an example of how to use the knobs. For some other ideas for using the knobs, refer to page 47. 1 Select the desired Main Voice (page 20). 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button several times until z appears in the display. 3 Rotate knob B all the way to the right (maximum), then play the keyboard with your right hand while operating the knob A with your left. Here, select “Voice No.156 SquareLd” (Square Lead) as a synth-lead type Voice. 001 Filter Cutoff Current function Quick Guide Assigning Functions to the Knobs Filter Resonance The target differs depending on the selected number. Function Target 1 Filter (Cutoff, Resonance) 2 Effect (Reverb, Chorus) 3 EG (Attack, Release) 4 Style Filter Style (page 26) or Pattern (page 27) (Cutoff, Resonance) 5 Volume Balance/ Pattern Retrigger Knob A: Audio input from the external device, and Style/Pattern/ Song Knob B: Pattern 6 DSP The DSP part selected in the Function Settings (page 60, Function 041). Main Voice and Dual Voice For details about each function, refer to page 46. NOTE • Only selecting a function combination will not affect the sound even if the knob arrow is not at the center position. The selected function only works when the knob is moved. NOTICE • After selecting 1, 2 or 3 by pressing the [ASSIGN] button, changing the Voice will replace the settings created via the knobs with the default settings of the new Voice. If you want to keep the settings you have created, make sure to memorize it to Registration Memory (page 35) before selecting a different Voice. NOTE • Rotating a knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level may result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles This instrument includes an Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the dial to select the desired Style. 4 For the Style List, refer to the separate Data List. Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment area to start playback. Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. Style Name Split Point BritRock 001 Style Number NOTE Quick Guide Appears when Style mode is active. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment (ACMP). • For information about how to play chords, refer to pages 54 and 55. 5 You can easily add variations to your performance by changing the section of the Style. For details, refer to page 50. Appears when the Auto Accompaniment is on. With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point becomes the “Auto Accompaniment area” and is used only for specifying the chords. The rhythm part as well as the bass and chord accompaniment play back when you play chords. Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2) Using the Music Database With this function, you can easily call up suitable panel settings such as Voice and Style simply by selecting your desired music genre. 1 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. 096 (C6) Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Both the ACMP and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. Music Database name Jude Hey Auto Accompaniment area 001 The Split Point can be changed as desired (page 53). 3 Music Database number Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. EuTrance 2 057 26 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Rotate the dial to select the desired Music Database. This operation calls up panel settings, such as for Voice and Style, that are registered to the selected Music Database. For the Music Database List, refer to the separate Data List. Flashes when sync start is on. This puts the Style playback in “standby” and Style starts playing back when you play the keyboard. Appears when Music Database is in use. 3 Play the keyboard as described in steps 4–5 of the previous section. Playing with Patterns Like a DJ! The Pattern playback function lets you repeatedly play various rhythm patterns, and is particularly effective in dance music styles, such as Hip Hop, House, etc. Try out the cool DJ-like performance features—changing keys in the left-hand area of the keyboard and rotating the knobs for dynamic sound variations.  Using the Retrigger function Press the [PATTERN] button, then use the dial to select the desired Pattern. Pattern Retrigger is a function which repeats the first part of the current Pattern, for a rhythmic break effect. For details, refer to page 52. ACMP is automatically turned on, and the keyboard is divided into the Auto Accompaniment area (page 26) and melody area.  Transposing playback by pressing any note in the Auto Accompaniment area. ChartDnc Split Point 001 SECT B Flashes 2 Quick Guide 1 Specified key Press the [START/STOP] button to start Pattern playback.  Changing the sound via the Knobs Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to select “4 STYLE CUTOFF/STYLE RESONANCE” then rotate the knobs A and B. You can also start playback by pressing any note in the Auto Accompaniment area. During Pattern playback, enjoy creating sound variations via the following operations.  Turning on/off individual tracks via the [TRACK CONTROL] buttons  Playing Arpeggios in the right-hand area Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn it on, then press the notes in the right-hand area of the keyboard. On/off status is shown in the display (page 19) NOTE NOTE • When you select a Voice between 292 and 301, Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice. Playing a key to the left of the Split Point turns Arpeggio on as well as specifies the key for Pattern playback. • Up to two track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning on or off.  Changing the Section via the [A]–[E] buttons 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. SECT B PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson.  Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. • • • • • • • • Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for the Song Lesson. These piano ensemble pieces are also well suited for the Song Lesson. These songs are ideal for when you want to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns. Songs you record yourself (page 32). FLASH MEMORY: Songs transferred from a computer (page 36). USB: Songs in the USB flash drive (page 62). NOTE Quick Guide • In addition to the 30 preset Songs in this instrument, you can enjoy extra Songs downloadable from the Yamaha website. For details, refer to page 11. • For instructions on transferring Songs from a computer to this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” The numbers are generally assigned to the Songs in the following sequence: Songs transferred from a computer, Songs in the USB flash drive. When you transfer a Song from a computer while the USB flash drive is connected to the instrument, the transferred Song will be inserted before the first USB Song number, moving all USB Song numbers later in sequence. Song name Listening to a Demo Song Jeanie Press the [DEMO] button to play Demo Songs 001– 003 in sequence. Playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). 013 Song number Appears when in the Style mode. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] or [ Stop) button. ] (Start/ 2 Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [ button again. ] (Start/Stop) Jeanie Selecting and Playing Back a Song 013 001 Current measure 1 Press the [SONG] button, then rotate the dial to select the desired Song. For a list of available Songs, refer to the Song List in the separate Data List. You can select User Songs, Songs transferred from a computer, and Songs in the USB flash drive in the same way as above. 28 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Each arrow mark flashes in time with the beat. NOTE • External MIDI Songs containing the Portamento Control and Scale Tune settings may not be played correctly. NOTE • If playback of a Song in the USB flash drive or a Song transferred from a computer produces the distorted sound, decrease the Song volume (page 57) to reduce the distortion, and then adjust the master volume (page 16). Playing Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. [ ] Fast Forward During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again. To stop playback, press the [ button. ] (Start/Stop) NOTE [ ] Fast Reverse During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. [ ] Pause During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. • The [ ], [ ] and [ ] buttons cannot be used for Demo Song playback started by using the [DEMO] button. Quick Guide • If you want to set start point “A” to the top of the Song, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting playback. • If you want to set end point “B” to the end of the Song, specify only the A point and play back the Song to the end. Turning Each Track On/Off Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/off status. Playing a Specified Section of a Song Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A Track number on—Track will be played back B Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data 1 2 Start playback of the Song (page 28). When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button to set the A point. NOTE • Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning on or off. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 29 Using the Song Lesson Feature You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try practicing with these three Song Lesson types while referring to the music scores in the Song Book downloaded from the website (page 11). Lesson Types  Lesson 1 (LISTEN): You do not need to play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the selected part will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it as best as you can.  Lesson 2 (TIMING): Simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes will sound.  Lesson 3 (WAITING): Try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing. NOTE • If you want to maintain a steady playback tempo during Lesson 3, change the parameter in the Function Settings (page 61, Function 064). Quick Guide 1 Select the desired Song for your lesson (page 28). button until the desired number is shown on the display. NOTE TIMING • The Song Lesson can be applied to Songs transferred from a computer, and Songs in USB flash drive. However, some of the Lesson functions may not be applied to some Songs due to the structure of the Song data. Lp2 • The Song Lesson cannot be applied to the User Songs and the Songs other than SMF format 0. 2 The notation and key positions you should play are shown. Turn off the part you want to practice. For the right-hand lesson, press the [1/RIGHT] button to turn off the right-hand part. For the lefthand lesson, press the [2/LEFT] button to turn off the left-hand part. For lessons using both hands, turn off both parts. ForElise Right-hand lesson Track 1 is unlit 015 Left-hand lesson Track 2 is unlit Both-hands lesson Track 1 and 2 are unlit 3 Press the [LESSON] button to start playback of the Song. Pressing the [LESSON] button repeatedly will change the lesson number from 1: LISTEN  2: TIMING  3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this 30 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual In lesson 2, both-hands lesson is indicated as “LR2,” right-hand lesson is indicated as “R2” and left-hand lesson is indicated as “L2.” To stop the lesson, press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button. Even during playback, you can change the lesson number by pressing the [LESSON] button. 4 Pressing one of the TRACK CONTROL buttons repeatedly will toggle the on/off status of each part, which can be shown on the display. 007 When Song playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. In lesson 2 (TIMING) and 3 (WAITING), when the Song reaches to the end, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: “Excellent!”, “Very Good!”, “Good”, “OK”. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. ~~~~~~~~ Excellent! ~~~~~~ Very Good! ~~~~ Good ~~ OK After the evaluation display is shown, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Using the Song Lesson Feature Making Practice Perfect— Repeat & Learn If you want to practice a specific section in which you made a mistake or you have difficulty with, use the Repeat & Learn function. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a lesson. Quick Guide The Song position will move back four measures, a one-measure count will play, then Song playback will start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat with a one-measure count-in. To exit from this status, press this button again. NOTE • You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 31 Recording Your Performance You can record up to 10 of your performances to the instrument as User Songs. The recorded User Songs can be played back in the same way as the preset Songs. NOTE • This instrument records your performance and save it in an original format. If you want MIDI data, convert it to SMF by saving it to the connected USB flash drive (page 65). Track 1 will be selected as recording target of the melody, and the Track A will be selected as recording target of the accompaniment part (the chord progression for the Style or the key change for the Pattern) automatically. If a User Song was selected beforehand, recording data will overwrite Tracks 1 and A of the selected Song. Track Structure of a Song A Song can be recorded to the six tracks. You can record without specifying tracks, but you can also record each track one by one (e.g., only the righthand part or the left-hand part) to create a complete piece which may be difficult to play at once. User 1 Quick Guide  Melody Tracks [1/RIGHT]–[5] pEC The melody performance will be recorded.  Accompaniment Track [A] Flashes The chord progression (for the Style) or the key change (for the Pattern) will be recorded. 001 Flashes NOTE • The ACMP on/off status cannot be changed after the [REC] button is pressed. To exit from this status, press the [REC] button again. Melody Tracks Accompaniment Track 4 Start recording. • When you press the [SONG] button in step 2, play any note to start recording. • When you select a Style in step 2, play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment area to start recording with Style playback, or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording only with playback of the Rhythm part of a Style. Quick Recording This section explains how to record without specifying a track. This is useful when you record a new Song from scratch. • When you select a Pattern in step 2, play a key in the Accompaniment area or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording with Pattern playback. User 1 1 Make the desired settings including the Main Voice selection. 2 Make the desired settings of your performance. pEC Current measure number The current measure will be shown on the display while recording. • If you want to record only the melody performance, press the [SONG] button. • If you want to record the performance using a Style, press the [STYLE] button. • If you want to record the performance using a Pattern, press the [PATTERN] button. 3 Press the [REC] button to enter the Record Ready mode. This operation selects the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) as the recording target. 32 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 003 5 Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) or [REC] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button, and then waiting until playback ends. or Recording Your Performance NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of data. 6 To play back the recorded Song, press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button. Recording to a Specified Track This section explains how to record to a specified track. This is useful when you want to record the additional performances to an already recorded Song, or re-record only one track of an already recorded Song. 1 NOTE Press the [SONG] button, and then select the desired User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) as the recording target. • When recording Pattern playback with Retrigger Note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome and Arpeggio playback are not synchronized with playback of the recorded Song. Limitations while recording • The on/off status of ACMP cannot be changed. • Playback cannot be changed between Style and Pattern. • The Pattern number can be changed while the Style number cannot. • When you use a Style/Pattern, the following parameters cannot be changed: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Time Signature, Style number and Style/Pattern Volume. • Performance with a Split Voice cannot be recorded. • The audio input from an external device (playback sound on the connected computer or audio device) cannot be recorded. User 1 031 2 Quick Guide After recording finishes, “Writing!” appears indicating that the recorded data is being stored, and then the recorded track numbers in the display will light. While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button to enter the Record Ready mode. User 1 pEC Flashes 001 Selected track flashes  If you want to record only the melody: While holding down the [REC] button, press one of the [1/RIGHT]–[5] buttons. Press and hold  If you want to record only the Style playback: Press the [STYLE] button, select the desired Style, then simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [A] button. ACMP is automatically turned on. Press and hold PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 33 Recording Your Performance  If you want to record only the Pattern playback: 4 Press the [PATTERN] button, then select the desired Pattern. While holding down the [REC] button, press the [A] button. ACMP is automatically turned on. Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song This lets you clear individual tracks from a User Song. Press and hold 3 Quick Guide Same as in steps 4 to 6 (page 32) in “Quick Recording.” 1 Press the [SONG] button, and then select the desired User Song from 031– 040 (User 1–10). 2 From [1/RIGHT]–[5] and [A], press the Track button to be cleared for longer than a second. NOTE • If the memory becomes full while recording, an alert message will appear and recording will stop automatically. In this case, delete unnecessary data by using the Clear functions (below), then execute the recording again. Clearing a User Song You can clear all tracks of a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button, then select the User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) to be cleared. 2 Hold down the track [1/RIGHT] and [A] buttons simultaneously for longer than a second. Hold simultaneously for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrUser1 YES 3 34 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. To cancel this operation, press the [-] button. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Hold for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrTr1 YES 3 Press the [+/YES] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the track. A confirmation message will appear on the display.To cancel this operation, press the [-] button. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. Memorizing Your Favorite Settings (Registration Memory) Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory 1 Make the desired settings, such as those for Voice, Style, and Pattern. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during Song playback. 2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [BANK/MEMORY] button to call up a Bank number on the display. 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Up to 32 settings (eight banks of four each) can be memorized. Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 2 3 Press and release the [BANK/MEMORY] button to call up a Bank number on the display. Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a Bank number. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[4] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. Quick Guide The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) panel settings such as Voice and Style to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by simply pressing a single button. The registered settings for four Registration Memory buttons will be saved as a single Bank. Bank 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a Bank number. 4 While holding down the [BANK/MEMORY] button, press one of the [1]–[4] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. The recalled Registration Memory number appears in the display for a few seconds. REGIST 1 Registration Memory number 1 NOTE • When the [SONG] lamp is lit, the Style or Pattern settings will not be recalled even if you press the REGISTRATION MEMORY button to which the Style or Pattern settings are memorized. To recall Style/Pattern settings, make sure to press the [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button beforehand. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory Press and hold A “Writing!” message appears indicating that the panel settings will be stored. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of data.  Style settings: Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Track on/off, Main section A/B, Tempo  Pattern settings: Pattern number, Pattern volume, Section, Track on/off, Tempo  Voice settings: Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions (page 58) Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions  Effect settings: Reverb Type, Chorus Type  Arpeggio settings: Arpeggio on/off and all settings of the related Functions  Harmony settings: Harmony on/off and all settings of the related Functions  DSP: Parameter values of Knobs A/B and settings of the related Functions  Other settings: Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Effect Combination number, Split Point, Scale Tune PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 35 Connecting to Other Devices CAUTION • Before connecting the instrument to external devices, turn off the power of all the devices. Also, before turning the power on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the devices or electrical shock may occur. Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers 4 Adjust the audio playback volume on the audio device, then adjust the entire volume by rotating the [MASTER VOLUME] control of the instrument. Quick Guide By connecting an audio device such as a portable music player to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, you can output the sound of the audio device through the built-in speakers of this instrument. This lets you play the keyboard along with the playback of your audio player. NOTE • If you want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob A (page 46). The audio input volume from the [AUX IN] jack can also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 004). If you increase the volume to more than 50, the audio device sound may be distorted. NOTICE • To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the external device, and then to the instrument. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument, and then to the external device. 1 5 Connect the headphone jack of an audio device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack by using an audio cable. Play the keyboard along with the sound of audio device. NOTE • You can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of audio playback. For details, refer to page 37. 6 Audio device (portable music player, etc.) Adjust the volume balance between the audio device and this instrument. After finishing the performance, stop playback of the audio device. Stereo mini plug Headphone jack Audio cable Stereo mini plug Connecting to a Computer Connecting the [USB TO HOST] terminal of this instrument and the computer via a USB cable allows you to transmit/receive MIDI and Audio data to/from the computer. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” USB terminal NOTE [USB TO HOST] terminal • If you are using a computer or a smart device such as an iPhone/iPad, you can also connect it to the [USB TO HOST] terminal (see “Connecting to a Computer,” at right). 2 Turn on the audio device, and then this instrument. 3 Start play back of the connected audio device. The sound of the audio device is output through the speakers of this instrument. 36 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Computer Instrument USB cable Connecting to Other Devices Files that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument (and vice versa). • Song file: .mid (SMF format 0/1) • Style file: .sty • Backup file: PSR-E453.BUP* (PSR-E453)/ PSREW400.BUP* (PSR-EW400) * Backup parameters (page 39) can be transferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single file. NOTE • The volume can be adjusted on the smart device, and also by using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob A (page 46). The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 005). NOTE • Up to 256 Song files can be transferred to this instrument. NOTICE • Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. • If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Otherwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings of the computer or the application software. Using the Melody Suppressor When you output the audio sound of an external audio device or a computer connected to the [AUX IN] jack or the [USB TO HOST] terminal through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of audio playback. You can use the function to practice the melody part along with the audio playback. 1 Play back audio on the connected external device. 2 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button to turn it on. NOTE • The volume can be adjusted on the computer, and also by using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob A (page 46). The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 005). MelodySP on NOTE • Depending on the particular music source, the melody or vocal sound may not be cancelled as expected even when if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. In such a case, try adjusting the pan position to be cancelled in the Function Settings (page 59, Function 039). Connecting to an iPhone/iPad You can use a smart device, such as an iPhone or iPad, with the instrument for a variety of musical purposes by connecting it to the instrument’s [USB TO HOST] terminal. For details on connections, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” For information about the compatible smart devices and application tools, access the following page: http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/ • When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Function 058) is set to OFF, the Melody Suppressor function cannot be used. 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. NOTICE • If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Otherwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings of the computer or the application software. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 37 Quick Guide • If you transfer a Style file from the computer to this instrument, you need to load it to this instrument for Style playback. For details, refer to “Loading a Style File” (page 67). Connecting to Other Devices Using an External Stereo System for Playback (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400) You can connect a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound by using the OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks. Powered speaker Quick Guide Phone plug (standard) Speaker Mute On/Off Setting (PSR-EW400) You can set whether the sound of this instrument is always output from its built-in speaker or not. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “SP Mute” (Function 067). Input jack SP Mute Phone plug (standard) OFF 067 Audio signal Audio cable You can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. NOTE • Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. NOTE • Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. NOTICE • To avoid possible damage, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Since this instrument’s power may automatically be turned off due to the Auto Power Off function (page 16), turn off the power to the external device, or disable Auto Power Off when you do not intend to operate the instrument. NOTICE • Do not route the output from the OUTPUT jacks to the [AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the [OUTPUT] jacks and then back again, creating a feedback loop that could make normal performance impossible, and may even damage the equipment. 38 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the dial to select the desired setting. When Speaker Mute set to “ON,” the Speaker sound is off. You can only hear the instrument sound via the headphones or an external device connected to the [OUTPUT] jacks. When Speaker Mute set to “OFF,” the speaker sound is always on as long as headphones are not connected. Backup and Initialization Backup parameters • User Songs (page 32) • Style data transferred from a computer and loaded to Style numbers 221–230 (page 67) • Registration Memory (page 35) • FUNCTION Settings: (page 58) Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume, Song Volume, Pattern Volume, Metronome Volume, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Master EQ type, Audio Loop Back on/off, Your Tempo on/off, Auto Power Off Time, Battery Type, Language In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the data (including Style data that have not been loaded) transferred from the connected computer will be maintained even if you turn off the power. Initializing the Instrument You can erase the backup parameters described above, and then restores all the default factory settings. You can initialize the instrument via the following two methods. Backup Clear This operation initializes the backup parameters. While holding down the highest white key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. PSR-E453 Quick Guide Backup Parameters The following Backup parameters will be maintained even if the power is turned off. The highest white key PSR-EW400 Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data loaded to Style numbers 221–230 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. PSR-E453 The highest white key and the three highest black keys PSR-EW400 NOTICE • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save important data to a computer. For details, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 39 Handy Performance Features Reference Selecting a Reverb Type Selecting a Chorus Type The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Reverb type for the entire sound, you can select a different Reverb type manually. The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that sounds like many of the same Voices being played in unison. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can select a different Chorus type manually. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Reverb” (Function 036). 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Chorus” (Function 037). After a few seconds, the current Reverb type appears. After a few seconds, the current Chorus type appears. Reverb Chorus 036 037 Hall2 02 Chorus1 1 036 Current Reverb type Current Chorus type Reference NOTE NOTE • Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. • Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. 3 40 Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Reverb types, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. 037 3 Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Chorus types, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. Adjusting the Reverb depth Adjusting the Chorus depth You can adjust the Reverb depth applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in step 2, refer to the Function List on page 59. You can adjust the Chorus depth applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in step 2, refer to the Function List on page 59. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls—Transpose The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. 1 Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to call up “Transpos” (Function 006). Pitch Controls—the [PITCH BEND] wheel The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. Transpos 00 Use the dial to set the Transpose value between -12 and +12. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 008). Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down between 427.0 Hz and 453.0 Hz in approximately 0.2 Hz increments. The default value is 440.0 Hz. 1 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Calling Up Optimum Panel Settings—One Touch Setting (OTS) Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Tuning” (Function 007). Select a Song, Style or Pattern by pressing the [SONG], [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button, then select Voice number 000 OTS (page 20). This lets you automatically call up the optimum panel settings such as Voice and tempo for the current Song, Style or Pattern. Tuning 007 3 Use the dial to set the Tuning value. 440.0Hz 007 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 41 Reference 2 006 Handy Performance Features Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically and expressively control the level of the Voices according to your playing strength. Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for longer than a second to call up “Master EQ” (Function 038). After a few seconds, the current Master EQ type appears. Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “TouchRes” (Function 010). MasterEQ After a few seconds, the current Touch Response appears. 038 Hold for longer than a second. TouchRes 010 Speaker 1 Medium 2 038 Current Master EQ type 010 Reference Current Touch Response 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Master EQ type. Master EQ types 3 Use the dial to select a Touch Response setting between 1 and 4. Touch Response 42 1 Soft Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure. 2 Medium Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. 3 Hard Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness. 4 Fixed All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard is played. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 1 Speaker Optimum for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. 2 Headphone Optimum for headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 3 Boost Features more powerful sound. Depending on the selected Voice and Style, etc., the sound may be more subject to distortion than other EQ types. 4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance. 5 Bright Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. 6 Mild Lowers the high range for a softer sound. Scale Tuning By default, the scale of this keyboard is set to Equal Temperament — the same tuning as with any acoustic piano. However, the setting can be changed to any other scale according to the music genre or music style you want to play. Selecting a Scale You can select a desired scale among the various preset scales. 1 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Setting the Base Note for Each Scale Please make sure to specify the appropriate base note, if you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, or create an original scale via Scale Tune function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to call up “BaseNote” (Function 049). Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to call up “Scale” (Function 048). After a few seconds, the current scale appears. Scale 048 After a few seconds, the current base note appears. BaseNote Equal 1 049 048 Current scale Rotate the dial to select a scale. 01 The default setting is “1 Equal.” Equal 2 Pure Major 3 Pure Minor 4 Bayat (Arabic) 5 Rast (Arabic) 049 Current base note Preset Scale types 1 Reference C 3 3 Rotate the dial to select a base note from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb and B. The default setting is “C.” PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 43 Scale Tuning Tuning Each Note to Create an Original Scale 5 The setting can be reset to the initial default value by pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. You can tune the individual notes in cents (a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone) to create your original scale. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Rotate the dial to tune the note over a range of -64 to +63. 6 Repeat steps 2–5 as desired. 7 Memorize the settings here to the Registration Memory as desired (page 35). NOTE 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “TuneNote” (Function 050). After a few seconds, the current note appears. TuneNote 050 C 01 050 Current tuning note Reference 3 Rotate the dial to select the note to be tuned from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B. 4 Press the CATEGORY [+] button to call up “Tune” (Function 051). After a few seconds, the tuning value of the note selected in step 3 appears. Tune 051 Tune C 00 Tuning value 44 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 051 • When pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously after recalling an original scale memorized to Registration Memory, the scale will return to the original scale registered to Registration Memory, not to the default tune value. • When calling up “Scale” (Function 048) after using individual note scale tuning, “(Edited)” will be shown in the display. However, the edited scale settings will be erased by calling up another scale. For this reason, the edited settings should be memorized to the Registration Memory. Voice Settings Selecting a Dual Voice Voice Editing 1 For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can edit the parameters such as volume, octave and depth of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to create new, custom sounds that best suit your musical needs. Hold down the [DUAL] button for longer than a second to call up “D.Voice” (Function 020). After a few seconds, the current Dual Voice appears. D.Voice 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up the desired item. 020 Hold for longer than a second. 071 020 Voice parameters are indicated as below. • Main Voice parameters: M.****** (Function 011–019) • Dual Voice parameters: D.****** (Function 020–029) • Split Voice parameters: S.****** (Function 030–035) For details on each parameter, refer to the Function List on page 59. Current Dual Voice 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual Voice. Selecting a Split Voice 1 Hold down the [SPLIT] button for longer than a second to call up “S.Voice” (Function 030). After a few seconds, the current Split Voice appears. S.Voice 030 Hold for longer than a second. FngrBass 054 030 Current Split Voice 2 M.Volume 064 011 3 Rotate the dial to set the value. 4 Repeat steps 2–3 above to edit various parameters. 5 If necessary, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory (page 35). Reference Chamber Check the sound by playing the keyboard. The Voice-related settings are reset when a different Voice is selected. If you want to store the created sound for future recall, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory. Rotate the dial to select the desired Split Voice. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 45 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs This section describes each of the parameters which can be assigned to the Knobs (page 25). z Filter NOTE Filter effects shape the sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like sounds. NOTE • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. • Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies. • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. c EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to best match the music you’re playing.  Knob A: CUTOFF Level Adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Turning the knob to the left makes the sound more muffled or darker, while turning the knob A to the right makes the sound brighter. Sustain Level Level ATTACK Cutoff Frequency DECAY Key Played RELEASE Time Key Released  Knob A: ATTACK Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequency Frequencies in this range are cut off.  Knob B: RESONANCE Reference Adjusts the amount of Resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Turning the knob to the right will increases the Resonance to emphasize the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. Level Adjusts the Attack Time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Turning the knob to the right increases the Attack Time, thus slowing down the attack rate.  Knob B: RELEASE Adjusts the Release Time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Turning the knob to the right increases the Release Time, thus making a longer sustain. NOTE Resonance • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. v Frequency x Effect b Volume Balance/Pattern Retrigger  Knob A: REVERB  Knob A: VOLUME BALANCE Reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club. Turning the knob to the right increases the Reverb depth. Adjusts the volume balance between the audio playback volume from the connected audio device (page 36) or the computer (page 36) and the Song/Style/ Pattern. Turning the knob to the left decreases the external audio volume, while turning it to the right decreases the instrument volume.  Knob B: CHORUS Produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Turning the knob to the right increases the Chorus depth. 46 Style Filter Same as z. These effects are applied only to Style or Pattern playback. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Parameters Assigned to the Knobs Even when there is no audio input from an external device, the volume of Song, Style and Pattern can be adjusted by using the knob. The volume of Voices played on the keyboard cannot be adjusted. NOTE • When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Function 058) is set to OFF, you cannot adjust the volume of audio playback input from the external device.  Knob B: RETRIGGER RATE Adjusts the Retrigger Rate (the length of the part to be repeated) of the Pattern Retrigger function (page 52). Turning this knob to the right decreases it, and turning the knob to the left increases it. n DSP  Knob A/B: DSP PARAMETER A/B With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add DSP effects to your keyboard performance and the playback sound of Style, etc. (page 48). Each effect has two parameters which are assigned to Knobs A and B. By turning the knobs in real-time, you can alter the music in various dynamic ways, such as changing the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker or changing the degree of the Distortion. NOTE • When setting the tempo of the Pattern playback to more than 200, turning the knob to the right cannot change the length to be repeated. The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Try This Filter Select “143 Gemini” (a synth-lead type Voice) or “170 Noise” (page 20). Turning Knobs A or B while playing gives you the dynamic filter-sweep effects of an analog synthesizer. Effect Select the Voice “008 CP80.” Turn Knobs A and B all the way down to hear the direct, unprocessed sound of the Voice. As you turn Knob B toward the right, a Chorus effect with modulation is gradually applied to the sound. Turning Knob A to the right adds a Reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall. c EG Select the Voice “173 RSAnPad.” Turning Knob A all the way down makes the attack faster, and lets you hear the crisp, clear sound of the original Voice. Turning Knob B all the way down shortens the amount of time for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released. These knobs let you finely adjust the Voice to create the appropriate sound for the particular song you’re playing. v Style Filter Select the Style, “057 EuTrance.” Turn on the [ACMP ON/OFF] button and start Style playback (page 26). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled compared to the original, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. z x b n Volume Balance/ Pattern Retrigger DSP Reference Number/Effect Knob A: Connect an audio device or a computer (page 36), then turn this knob while playing audio on the external device. You can adjust the volume balance between the performance on this instrument and the audio input. Knob B: Select the Section C of the Pattern “002 FrenchDJ” and start Pattern playback. Turn this knob to the right while holding down the Section button C, and you can progressively shorten the Retrigger rate like a DJ would in performance. Select the Voice, “019 Cool!Org.” Press the [DSP] button to turn the DSP on, then set the DSP type (Function 040) to “01 RotarySp,” and the DSP part (Function 041) to “1 Keyboard” (page 60). Adjust the effect depth by turning Knob B while playing the keyboard, then use Knob A to change the rotating speed of the rotary speaker. When you move it slowly, you can create gradual speed changes like on a real rotary speaker. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 47 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs Adding DSP Effects DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. DSP effects are applied only to a specified part as described below. 3 Rotate the dial to select a DSP type. 4 Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to call up “DSP Part” (Function 041). Parts to which DSP effects are applied After a few seconds, the current part to which the DSP effects are applied appears.  When selecting the “Keyboard” part for DSP DSP part: Keyboard • Main Voice • Dual Voice • Track 1 of a User Song DSP part: Style • Style • Pattern • Track A of a User Song DSP Part DSP • ON/OFF • Type 041 Output Output Keyboard  When selecting the “Style” part for DSP DSP part: Keyboard • Main Voice • Dual Voice • Track 1 of a User Song DSP part: Style • Style • Pattern • Track A of a User Song Output DSP • ON/OFF • Type 1 5 Press the [DSP] button to turn DSP on. Reference Appears when the DSP is on. Although turning on DSP will select a DSP type suitable for the current panel setting, you can select a different DSP type as described in the following steps. 2 Hold down the [DSP] button for longer than a second to call up “DSP Type” (Function 040). After a few seconds, the current DSP type appears. DSP Type 040 Hold for longer than a second. RotarySp 01 040 Current DSP type 48 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 041 Current Part Output Rotate the dial to select a part to which the DSP effects are applied. Refer to the chart of “Parts to which DSP effects are applied” (see left), and select “Keyboard” or “Style.” This parameter is set in step 5. 1 For information about the available DSP types, refer to the Effect Type List in the Data List. 6 Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to assign Function 6 to the knobs (page 25). 7 Turn the knobs while playing the part selected in step 5 to see how the DSP effects change. 8 Press the [DSP] button again to turn DSP off. Limitations when recording a Song • DSP effects can be recorded only to Tracks 1 and A. • The DSP type and part cannot be changed while recording. • When recording to an existing User Song, if the part to which the DSP effects are applied differs from the recording tracks, DSP related setting data (DSP part, type, parameter A/B) will not be recorded or overwritten. • The DSP effects may not be applied as expected when a User Song is being played back. This is because the DSP effects are affected by the data recorded to the User Song. Arpeggio Settings Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Pattern Playback— Arpeggio Quantize When you play the keyboard to trigger an Arpeggio (page 24) along with Song/Style/Pattern playback, you’ll need to play the notes with correct timing to keep the Arpeggio in synchronization with the other playback tracks. However, your actual timing may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both). The “Arpeggio Quantize” function of this instrument will correct any slight imperfections in the timing (according to settings below), and then play back the Arpeggio appropriately. Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback continues even after the note has been released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Pdl Func” (Function 047). • Synchronizing to quarter notes • Synchronizing to 8th notes • No synchronization After a few seconds, the current pedal setting appears. Although the Arpeggio Quantize value is pre-programmed for each Arpeggio Type, you can change the value manually. 1 Pdl Func 047 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Sustain 1 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Quantize” (Function 046). After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio Quantize value appears. Current setting 3 2 046 046 Current value Rotate the dial to select a value from “OFF,” “1/8” and “1/16.” • 1/8 • 1/16 • OFF 047 If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.” 1/8 3 Rotate the dial to select “Arp Hold.” Arp Hold Quantize 2 Reference 2 047 4 Try playing Arpeggio with the footswitch. Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press the footswitch. Even if you release the notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch. Synchronizing to quarter notes Synchronizing to 8th notes No synchronization PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 49 Style and Pattern Settings Style Variations—Sections Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. INTRO MAIN A/B ENDING AUTO FILL INTRO This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the Main section. The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the Song. Playback of the Main section repeats indefinitely until another Section’s button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand. AUTO FILL This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B. ENDING This is used for the ending of the Song. When the Ending finishes, the Style playback stops automatically. The length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. Reference 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate the dial to select a Style. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. Beat arrows flash. To turn off Synchro Start, press the [SYNC START] button.  Synchro Start Appears when ACMP is turned on. When Synchro Start is on, Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. MAIN A Current Section (Main A or B) 50 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Style and Pattern Settings 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A Now, you’re ready to start Style playback of the Intro and then the Main A (or B) section. 6 Style Synchro Stop When you press the [SYNC STOP] button to turn on this function, the Style will only play while pressing chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. Releasing all the notes will stop Style playback. Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For information on how to play chords, see “Chords” on page 54. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Split Point NOTE • This function can be used when ACMP is turned on. Auto Accompaniment area After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. As printed on the front panel, a Style consists of six tracks. Turn on/off each track via the TRACK CONTROL buttons. Each of the tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/ off status. Reference 7 Turning Each Style Track On/Off FILL A≥B 8 On/off status is shown in the display (page 19) Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING NOTE • Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning Tracks on or off. The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. NOTE • Style numbers 196, 208–220 have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. When one of these Styles is selected, turn ACMP on, then specify the chord in the left hand area to play Style parts other than the Rhythm part. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 51 Style and Pattern Settings Pattern Variations—Sections Changing the Tempo Like the Styles, each Pattern features several Sections, allowing you to add dynamic variations to the performance. Five Sections (A–E) are provided. A Style or Pattern can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value in the display. Tempo Unlike the Styles, however, Patterns do not have the Sections dedicated to the beginning or ending of the Song, such as Intro and Ending. All Sections A–E will play back repeatedly until stopped manually. Pattern Retrigger Function This function restarts Pattern playback from the beginning. 1 Press the [PATTERN] button, then rotate the dial to select the desired Pattern. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button or press any key in the Auto Accompaniment area to start Pattern playback (page 27). Reference 3 By pressing the button of the currently playing Section, you can restart playback from the beginning. Holding down the button lets loop-play only the top portion of the Section. 090 Current Tempo 2 Rotate the dial to set a tempo from 011 to 280. Pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously can instantly reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style or Pattern. You can change the tempo during playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the required tempo. NOTE • The above operation applies also to Song or Arpeggio playback tempo. Tap Start You can start play back of the Style, Pattern or Song by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4 (4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/ 4, etc.). NOTE • Tap tempo setting range: 32–280 The top portion length (Retrigger Rate) can be changed by using the knob (page 47). NOTE • When recording Pattern playback with the Retrigger function, note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome and Arpeggio playback is not synchronized with playback of the recorded Song. 52 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Style and Pattern Settings Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Pattern SplitPnt 054 009 You can adjust the volume balance between Style or Pattern playback and your keyboard performance. 1 2 Split Point Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Rotate the dial to set the Split Point between 036 (C1) and 096 (C6) (on the PSR-E453) or 028 (E0) and 103 (G6) (on the PSR-EW400). Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “StyleVol” (Function 001) or “PatrnVol” (Function 003). Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2) StyleVol 001 Style (or Pattern) volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the volume between 000 and 127. Setting the Split Point The point on the keyboard that separates the lefthand area and the right-hand area of the keyboard is called the “Split Point.” The left-hand area is used to specify the chord for Style playback, to specify the key for Pattern playback, or to play the Split Voice. The default Split Point is key number 054 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “SplitPnt” (Function 009). You can call up this display also by pressing the [STYLE] then holding the [ACMP] button for longer than a second. 036 (C1) 060 (C3) 048 (C2) Split Voice, chords (Style) or keys (Pattern) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice (and Dual Voice) NOTE • During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be changed. Playing Chords Without Style Playback (Stop Accompaniment) If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON icon appears), and play the chord in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (with SYNC START off), the chord sound will be heard without Style playback. This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.” The specified chord will be shown in the display, and affects the Harmony function (page 23). Appears when auto accompaniment is on Auto Accompaniment area Specified chord PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 53 Reference 100 Style and Pattern Settings Chord Types for Style Playback For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh Reference C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, m7(11), 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. 54 Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Style and Pattern Settings 2-2. Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press the key labeled “M7” in the section between “CHORD TYPE” and “ROOT.” The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Press and hold the [LESSON] button for longer than a second to call up “Dict.” Dict. Hold for longer than a second. Notation of chord This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. Chord Type range Dict. Root range 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) The highest key • The range to the right of “ROOT”: Lets you specify the chord root, but produces no sound. • The range between “CHORD TYPE” and “ROOT”: Lets you specify the chord type, but produces no sound. • The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE”: Lets you play and confirm the chord specified in the above two ranges. 2 As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. Press the “G” key in the section to the right of “ROOT” so that the “G” is shown as the root note. To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+/YES] or [-/NO] button. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to press the key of “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 3 Reference Keyboard playing range Chord name (root and type) Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the range to the left of “CHORD TYPE.” When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. Specifying only the key for Pattern playback Note that you need to specify only the root note for Pattern playback, unlike Style playback for which you also need to specify the chord type. Dict. 001 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 55 Song Settings BGM (Background Music) Playback Random Song Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button will play back only a few of the internal Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs transferred to the instrument from a computer are played back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. 1 The order of Song repeat playback via the [DEMO] button can be changed between the numerical order and random order. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “PlayMode” (Function 066). Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up “DemoGrp.” After a few seconds, the current playback mode appears. After a few seconds, the current repeat playback group appears. PlayMode 066 DemoGrp 065 When the DemoGrp is set to “Demo,” this parameter cannot be set. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Rotate the dial to select a repeat playback group from the table below. Reference Demo Preset Songs 001–003 Preset All preset Songs User All User Songs Download All Songs transferred from a computer USB All Songs (MIDI files) in the connected USB flash drive NOTE • When User Songs, Download Songs and USB Songs data do not exist, Demo Songs are played back. 3 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again. 56 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 3 Rotate the dial to select “Random.” 4 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To return to the numerical order, select “Normal.” To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again. Song Settings This operation is same as that of the Style and Pattern. Refer to page 52. Tap Start This operation is same as that of the Style and Pattern. Refer to page 52. Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song You can change the Melody Voice of the current Preset Song temporarily to any other desired Voice. 1 Press the [SONG] button, select the desired Preset Song, then start playback (page 28). 2 Press the [VOICE] button, then rotate the dial to select the desired Voice. Song Volume Strings 1 070 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “SongVol” (Function 002). Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer than a second to call up “SONG MELODY VOICE.” After a few seconds, the Melody Voice of the Song will be changed to that selected in step 2. SongVol 100 SONG MEL 002 Song volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the Song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while in the Song mode. Hold for longer than a second. Reference Tempo Setting of the Song NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody Voice. • You cannot change the Melody Voice of a User Song. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 57 The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Find the desired item in the Function List on pages 58–61, then follow the instructions below. Basic Procedure in the Function Display 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. To restore the default value, press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. In the sole case of the MIDI Initial Send function (Function 057), pressing the [+/YES] button executes the function while pressing [-/NO] cancels it. Direct numeric entry 2 Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button several times until the desired item appears. Current item SplitPnt 054 009 • Decrement value by 1 • Cancel Current Function number 3 Use the dial, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the value of the selected function. Press simultane- • Increment ously to recall the value by 1 default setting. • Execute Some Function settings are maintained even if you turn off the power, and can be transferred to a computer as Backup Data (page 39). NOTE Reference • To exit from a Function display, press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG] or [PATTERN] button. Function List Function Number PSRE453 PSREW400 Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description Volume 001 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53. 002 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 57. 003 003 Pattern Volume PatrnVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53. 004 004 [AUX IN] Audio Volume AuxInVol 000–127 50 Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [AUX IN] jack (page 36). 005 005 [USB TO HOST] Audio Volume USBInVol 000–127 100 Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal (page 36, 37). 00 Refer to page 41. Overall 58 006 006 Transpose Transpos -12–12 007 007 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 008 008 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 009 009 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6; PSR-E453)/ 028–103 (E0–G6; PSR-EW400) 010 010 Touch Response TouchRes 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard), 4 (Fixed) PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 440.0Hz 02 Refer to page 41. Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the [PITCH BEND] wheel (page 41), in semitone increments. 054 (F#2) Refer to page 53. 2 (Medium) Refer to page 42. The Functions Function Number PSRE453 Function PSREW400 Display Range/Settings Default Value Description Main Voice (page 20) 011 011 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * 012 012 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 013 013 Pan M.Pan * Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. 014 014 Reverb Depth M.Reverb 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice's signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 015 015 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 016 016 Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice reaches the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the faster the attack rate. 017 017 Release Time M.Releas 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice falls to 0 when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain. 018 018 Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 46) of the Main Voice. 019 019 Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (page 46) of the Main Voice. 000 (left)– 064 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the volume of the Main Voice. 020 020 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–758 * Selects a Dual Voice. 021 021 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 022 022 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. * Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. 000 (left)– 064 (center)– 127 (right) 023 023 Pan D.Pan 024 024 Reverb Depth D.Reverb 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 025 025 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 026 026 Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice reaches the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the faster the attack rate. 027 027 Release Time D.Releas 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice falls to 0 when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain. 028 028 Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 46) of the Dual Voice. 029 029 Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (page 46) of the Dual Voice. 001–758 054 (FngrBass) Reference Dual Voice (page 21) Split Voice (page 21) 030 030 Split Voice S.Voice 031 031 Volume S.Volume 000–127 032 032 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 033 033 Pan S.Pan 034 034 Reverb Depth 035 035 000 (left)– 064 (center)– 127 (right) 080 -1 Selects a Split Voice. Determines the volume of the Split Voice. Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 064 Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. S.Reverb 000–127 008 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 000 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Effects 036 036 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Refer to page 40. 037 037 Chorus Type Chorus 1–6 ** Refer to page 40. 038 038 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 (Speaker), 2 (Headphone), 3 (Boost), 4 (Piano), 5 (Bright), 6 (Mild) 1 (Speaker) Refer to page 42. 039 039 Melody Suppressor SupprPan L63, L62...L02, L01, C, R01, R02...R62, R63 C Determines the pan position to be cancelled when the Melody Suppressor (page 37) is turned on. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 59 The Functions Function Number PSRE453 Function PSREW400 Display Range/Settings Default Value Description DSP (page 48) 040 040 DSP Type DSP Type 01–10 041 041 DSP Part DSP Part 1 (Keyboard) 2 (Style) 01 1 (Keyboard) Refer to page 48. Harmony (page 23) 042 042 Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type. 043 043 Harmony Volume HarmVol * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. * Determines the Arpeggio type. 000–127 Arpeggio (page 24) 044 044 Arpeggio Type ARP Type 001–150 045 045 Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) 046 046 Arpeggio Quantize Quantize 047 047 Pedal Function 1 (Sustain) / Pdl Func 2 (Arp Hold) / 3 (Hold+Sus) 1 (OFF), 2 (1/8), 3 (1/16) Depending on the Arpeggio type When “Thru” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined by your playing strength. When “Original” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined by the original setting regardless of your playing strength. Depending on the Arpeggio type Refer to page 49. * Refer to page 49. 1 (Equal) Refer to page 43. Refer to page 43. Scale Tuning (page 43) Reference 048 048 Scale Scale 1 (Equal), 2 (Pure Maj), 3 (Pure min), 4 (Bayat), 5 (Rast) 049 049 Base Note BaseNote 01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D), 04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F), 07 (F#), 08 (G), 09 (Ab), 10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B) 01 (C) 050 050 Tuning Note TuneNote 01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D), 04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F), 07 (F#), 08 (G), 09 (Ab), 10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B) 01 (C) 051 051 Tuning Tune -64–63 052 052 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to application software on a computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. 053 053 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to application software on a computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 054 054 Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF ON Determines whether MIDI messages generated via keyboard performance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. 055 055 Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. 056 056 Song Out SongOut OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. 057 057 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO - Audio Loop Back LoopBack ON/OFF ON Refer to page 44. Depending on the Scale MIDI ON/OFF Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on a computer. Audio (page 36) 058 60 058 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Determines whether Audio sound input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal is returned to the computer or not with the performance played on the instrument. If you want to output only the sound played on this instrument to the computer, set this parameter to OFF. The Functions Function Number PSRE453 Function PSREW400 Display Range/Settings Default Value Description Metronome (page 22) 059 059 Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. 060 060 Time Signature Denominator Half note, Quarter TimesigD note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note 061 061 Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson (page 30) 062 062 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16, OFF 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in USB flash drive or transferred from a computer. 063 063 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16, OFF 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in USB flash drive or transferred from a computer. 064 064 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON This parameter is for Lesson 3 (WAITING). When set to ON, playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed at which you are playing. Demo Group DemoGrp Demo Play Mode 1 (Normal) PlayMode 2 (Random) Demo (page 28) 065 066 065 066 1 (Demo) / 2 (Preset) / 3 (User) / 4 (Download) / 5 (USB) 1 (Demo) Refer to page 56. 1 (Normal) Refer to page 56. OFF Refer to page 38. Speaker Mute (page 38) – 067 Speaker Mute SP Mute ON/OFF Auto Power Off (page 16) 067 068 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (min.) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. 1 (Alkaline) / 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. English Determines the language for the Song file names. Determines the language for the name of the files in the USB flash drive or the files loaded from a computer. Battery (page 14) 068 069 Battery Type Battery Type 069 070 Language Language English/Japanese Reference Language (page 63) * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Pattern. NOTE • The settings of “MIDI” and “Audio” is useful when an external device such as a computer is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal (page 36). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 61 USB Flash Drive Operations By connecting the USB flash drive (sold separately) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you can save the data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter settings. The saved data can be recalled to this instrument again for the future use. IMPORTANT • You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable enough to last through these crucial operations. When you try executing certain functions, the “UseAdpt” indication may appear and the selected function cannot be executed. Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.  Compatible USB devices • USB flash drive Other USB devices such as a USB hub, computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://download.yamaha.com/ Reference Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading from the USB device may differ depending on the type of data or the status of the instrument. NOTE • The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.  Connecting a USB device • When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. NOTICE • Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device while executing playback/recording and file management operations (such as Save, Delete and Format), or when accessing the USB device. Failure to observe this may result in “freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB device and the data. • When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two operations. NOTE • When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters. Do not connect an extension cable. Using a USB Flash Drive By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.  Number of USB flash drives that can be used Only one USB flash drive can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.  Formatting a USB flash drive You should format the USB flash drive only with this instrument (page 64). A USB flash drive formatted on another device may not operate properly. NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data.  To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect.  Turning off the instrument When turning off the instrument, make sure that the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by playback/recording or file management (such as during Save, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data. 62 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Drive Operations NOTE • Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 62. • Messages may appear on the display during File Control procedures to aid in smooth operation. Refer to the Message List on page 69 for details. 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, and wait until “USB” appears on the left corner of the display. The “USB” indication confirms that the connected USB flash drive has been mounted or recognized. Mounting (flashes) 2 Mounted (lights) Hold down the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. File Control Display List Display File Control function Page Load STY Loading a Style File 67 Load USR Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive 66 Save SMF Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive 65 Save USR Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive 64 Del SMF Deleting a SMF File in a USB Flash Drive 68 Del USR Deleting a User File in a USB Flash Drive 68 Format? Formatting a USB Flash Drive 64 Exit? Exiting from a File Control Display 69 NOTE • You can also exit from a File Control display only by pressing the [FUNCTION] button. Recognizable file location in the USB flash drive for Song playback (page 28) USB flash drive (Root) Song File Load STY Song File Hold for longer than a second. Can be selected/ played. Song File Song File  If “UnFormat” followed by “Format?” Reference Connecting a USB Flash Drive Cannot be selected/ played. appears: This indicates that the connected USB flash drive requires formatting. Execute the Format operation by following the instructions starting with step 2 on page 64. NOTE The File Control display cannot be called up in the following situations. • During playback of Style, Pattern, or Song • When “USB” does not appear even if you have connected a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NOTE • No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played while the File Control display is showing, and only buttons related to File Control operations will be active. 3 IMPORTANT • If you manage the Song files in the USB flash drive by using a computer, etc., make sure to store the data either in the USB flash drive's root directory or a firstlevel/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a secondlevel folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. Song title display language File names containing Japanese katakana characters will be properly displayed if the instrument’s display language is set to “Japanese.” All display information other than file names will be displayed in English even if “Japanese” is selected. For details, refer to page 61 Function 069 (PSR-E453)/Function 070 (PSR-EW400). Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up the desired File Control function, then execute it. For details, refer to the table on the right. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 63 USB Flash Drive Operations Formatting a USB Flash Drive The Format operation lets you prepare commercially available USB flash drive for use with this instrument. NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data. 1 2 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Format?.” Format? 3 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Reference Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again or the [+/YES] button to execute the Format operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and the “USER FILES” folder will be created in the USB flash drive. Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive The following data created on this instrument comprise the “User Data.” • All 10 User Songs (page 32) • Styles which have been transferred from a computer then loaded to Style numbers 221–230 (page 67). • All the Registration Memory settings (page 35) The User Data can be saved as a single “User File” (.usr) to a USB flash drive. NOTE • The extension (.usr) of the User File will not be shown on the display of this instrument. Confirm the extension on the computer display when connecting the USB flash drive to a computer. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Save USR.” Save USR 3 NOTICE • The Format operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 5 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As the target file name, “USER***” (***: number) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different file name from “USER001”– “USER100.” USER001 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Overwriting existing files If a file that already contains data is selected as the target user file, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. 64 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Drive Operations 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Save operation. Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and a User file (.usr) will be saved in a “USER FILES” folder which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. A User Song can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 and saved to a USB flash drive. NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. NOTE • The amount of time required for this operation may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash drive. SMF (Standard MIDI File) format With this format, various events via the keyboard performance such as note on/off and Voice selection will be recorded as MIDI data. The SMF Format 0 and Format 1 are available. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available Song files (MIDI files) are provided in SMF Format 0. NOTE Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. NOTE • If you want to recall the User file (.usr) to this instrument again, execute the Load operation (page 66). • Patterns recorded to a User Song cannot be converted to SMF. • The DSP effect (page 48) cannot be converted to SMF format. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Save SMF.” Save SMF 3 Reference 6 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As the target User Song, “USER**” (**: number 1–10) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different User Song from “USER01”–“USER10” then press the [0/EXECUTE] button. User 1 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. As the target file name on the USB flash drive, “SONG***” (***: number 1–100) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select the different file. SONG001 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 65 USB Flash Drive Operations 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Overwriting existing files If a file that already contains data is selected, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. 6 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Save operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and a User Song will be saved as the SMF format 0 in a “USER FILES” folder which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive A User data (page 64) saved as a User file (.usr) to the USB flash drive can be loaded to this instrument. NOTICE • Loading a User file will overwrite and erase the existing data, including all 10 User Songs, Style data loaded to the Style numbers 221–230, and all the Registration Memory settings. Save important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash drive before loading a User file. IMPORTANT • Note that User files should be saved in the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash drive. Files saved outside this folder cannot be recognized. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Load USR.” NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. NOTE • The amount of time required for this operation may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash drive. • If a Pattern has been recorded to the User Song, the Save operation cannot be executed by pressing the [0/ EXECUTE] button or the [+/YES] button, and “Can’tUse” appears on the display. Reference 7 Load USR 3 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. “USER***” (***: number) appears on the display as the User file name in the USB flash drive. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different User file. USER001 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Load operation. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 66 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Drive Operations 6 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. 7 Check the loaded data by calling up the User Song, one of the Styles 221–230, and Registration Memory settings. 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 221– 230) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different number. Load To? 221 Loading a Style File Style data created on another instrument or a computer can be loaded to the Style numbers 221–230, and you can play them like the internal preset Styles. The following two Load operations are available. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. 6 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Load operation. • Loading of a Style file (.sty) saved on the root directory on the USB flash drive • Loading of a Style file (.sty) transferred from a computer via the Musicsoft Downloader and stored in the internal memory of this instrument After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. NOTE • For instructions on transferring a Style file from a computer via the Musicsoft Downloader, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” After data transfer, load the Style data to one of the Style numbers 221–230 to enable playback. NOTICE A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 7 Press the [STYLE] button, rotate the dial to select a Style from 221–230, and then try playing it back. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Load STY.” Reference • Loading a Style file will overwrite and erase the existing data of the destination number. Save important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash drive before loading. Load STY 3 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. The name of a Style file in the USB flash drive or internal memory of this instrument will appear on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different Style file. DiscoFox USb PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 67 USB Flash Drive Operations Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Drive Deleting an SMF File in the USB Flash Drive User Files (.usr) in the root directory of the USB flash drive can be deleted. You can delete a SMF file that has been saved in the USB flash drive via the Save SMF operation (page 65). IMPORTANT • Only User files (.usr) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder cannot be recognized. 1 2 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Del USR.” IMPORTANT • Only SMF files (.mid) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder cannot be recognized. This operation applies only to file names with the “SONG***” (***: 001–100) format. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Del SMF.” Del USR Del SMF 3 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. User file names in the USB flash drive appear on the display as “USER****” (****: number). If desired, rotate the dial to select a different User file. 3 USER001 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. SMF file names in the USB flash drive appear on the display as “SONG****” (****: number). If desired, rotate the dial to select a different SMF file. Reference SONG001 4 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete operation. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 68 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. NOTICE • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. USB Flash Drive Operations Message List Message To exit from the File Control display, press the [FUNCTION], [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG] or [PATTERN] button. You can also exit from the File Control function mode as follows: 1 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Exit?.” Exit? 2 Comment Can’tUse • Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the USB flash drive is being accessed. • Displayed when attempting to save a User Song recorded Pattern as SMF format 0. Complet. Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Data Err Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Disk Ful Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the memory becomes full. Delete any unnecessary data or use another USB flash drive. Error Displayed when a file error or operational error occurs. File Ful Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. Delete the unnecessary data or use another USB flash drive. no data There is no data in the memory. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button to exit from the File Control display. no file There is no file in the memory. Ovr (Flashes) Communication with the USB flash drive has been shut down because of overcurrent to the USB flash drive. Disconnect the USB flash drive from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Protect Displayed when trying to save or delete data on a protected USB flash drive, or formatting a protected USB flash drive. Set protect to off and try again. UnFormat Displayed when connecting an unformatted USB flash drive. UseAdpt USB flash drive save, delete, and format operations cannot be performed when the instrument is being powered from battery. Use an AC adaptor. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Reference Exiting from a File Control Display 69 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument The instrument is automatically turned off even if no operation is done. This is normal. This occurs due to the Auto Power Off function (page 16). • The volume is too soft. • The sound quality is poor. • The Style/Pattern/Song/Arpeggio stops unexpectedly or will not play. • The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. • The instrument turns off when a USB flash drive is connected. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones or completely recharged ones, or use the AC adaptor. No sound is produced even when the keyboard is played, or a Song, Style, or Pattern is being played back. Check whether a set of headphones or an audio cable is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT], or not. When such a connection is made, no sound is output from the speaker of this instrument. (PSR-EW400) Check the on/off status of the Speaker Mute setting (page 38). Make sure to set to OFF. Check the on/off status of the Local Control (page 61). Normally, set this parameter to ON. Appendix The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. No sound is produced even when playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard, although chords played in the left hand area are recognized. Check whether or not the Dictionary function (page 55) is used. When used, this is normal. Not all of the Voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off, when playing the keyboard, Arpeggio, Style or Pattern or Song. You have exceeded 48 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum amount of notes that can be played simultaneously) of this instrument. If the Main, Dual, and Split Voices are being used along with playback of Arpeggio, Style, Pattern or Song, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”). The sound of the Voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from note to note. The keyboard performance and playback of Style/Pattern/Song produces an unexpected or inappropriate sound, and cannot be restored to the normal status. Using the Knobs can produce dramatic changes in the sound, but may also produce unexpected or undesired sounds. If you want to restore the original, normal sound before being changed by the Knobs, press the [DSP] button to turn DSP off, change the Voice, Style, Pattern or Song, or press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the panel settings. The Style, Pattern or Song does not start even when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Arpeggio does not start even when the note is pressed with the Arpeggio turned on. Check the on/off status of the External Clock (page 61). Normally, set this parameter to OFF. The volume of the Style, Pattern or Song is too low. Check the volume setting in the Functions (pages 53 and 57). The chords played in the left hand area cannot be recognized even when ACMP is turned on. Check the Split Point setting (page 53). Set this to an appropriate value. Style parts other than the Rhythm part produce no sound. Check the on/off status of the ACMP (page 26). Make sure to turn ACMP on. The ACMP indicator does not appear on the display when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Check the on/off status of the [STYLE] lamp. When using a Style, press the [STYLE] button to turn on the [STYLE] lamp. Refer to the “Message List” on page 69 as required. 70 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Specifications Product Name Dimensions (W x D x H) Size/Weight Weight Control Interface Other Controllers Display Panel Tone Generation Polyphony Voices Preset Number of Keys Touch Response Pitch Bend Wheel Knobs Type Language Language Tone Generation Technology Effects Functions Preset Accompaniment Styles Reverb Chorus Master EQ Harmony DSP Dual Split Arpeggio Melody Suppressor Number of Styles Fingering Style Control External Styles Other Features Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Compatibility Patterns Preset Preset Songs (MIDI) Recording Format Functions Storage and Connectivity Amplifiers/ Speakers Amplifiers Speakers Live! Grand Piano + 236 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits + 40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices GM, XGlite 9 types 5 types 6 types 26 types 10 types Yes Yes 150 types 237 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits + 40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices Yes 220 Multi finger ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, SYNC STOP, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL, TRACK ON/OFF 10 378 Yes Style File Format (SFF) Number of Patterns Number of Sections Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Playback Recording Lesson/Guide USB Audio (USB TO HOST) Registration Number of Memory Buttons Metronome Tempo Range Overall Controls Transpose Tuning Scale Type Miscellaneous PIANO Button Internal Memory Storage External Drives Connectivity AWM Stereo Sampling 48 Number of Voices Compatibility Types Yes Yes LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) English English 25 5 30 10 6 (5 Melody + 1 Style/Pattern) Approx. 19,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) SMF (Formats 0 & 1) Original File Format (SMF 0 conversion function) Lesson 1 – 3 (Listening, Timing, Waiting), Repeat & Learn, Chord Dictionary 44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo 4 (x 8 banks) Yes 11 – 280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments) 5 types Yes (Portable Grand Button) Approx. 1.29 MB USB flash drive USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, DC IN 16V, Headphones, DC IN 12V, Headphones/Output, Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini), Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini) OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) 6W+6W 12 W + 12 W (When using PA-150 AC adaptor) (When using PA-300C AC adaptor) 12 cm x 2 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Appendix Keyboard PSR-E453 PSR-EW400 Digital Keyboard 946 mm x 405 mm x 140 mm 1178 mm x 412 mm x 138 mm (37-1/4” x 15-15/16” x 5-1/2”) (46-3/8” x 16-1/4” x 5-7/16”) 6.6 kg (14 lbs 9 oz.) 8.4 kg (18 lbs 8 oz.) (not including batteries) (not including batteries) 61 76 Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed 71 Specifications Adaptor Power Supply Batteries Power Supply Power Consumption PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 8W (When using PA-150 AC adaptor) Auto Power Off Included Accessories Separately Sold Accessories (May not be available depending on your area.) • Owner’s Manual • Data List • AC adaptor* (PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. • Music Rest • Online Member Product Registration • AC adaptor: PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Keyboard Stand: L-2C • Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/ HPH-50 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01 PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Six “D” size alkaline (LR20), manganese (R20) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 11 W (When using PA-300C AC adaptor) Yes • Owner’s Manual • Data List • AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha), power cord* * May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. • Music Rest • Online Member Product Registration • AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Keyboard Stand: L-6 • Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/ HPH-50 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01 * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix 72 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Index A E A-B Repeat ................................29 AC Adaptor ................................14 Accessories ...............................10 ACMP ........................................26 Arpeggio ..............................24, 49 Arpeggio Quantize ....................49 Arpeggio Type ...........................24 Arpeggio Velocity ......................60 Attack ..................................46, 59 Audio Device .............................36 Audio Loop Back .......................60 Auto Accompaniment ................26 Auto Accompaniment area ........26 Auto Power Off ....................16, 61 AUX IN ......................................36 EG (Envelope Generator) ......... 46 Ending ....................................... 50 EQ (Equalizer) .......................... 42 External Clock ........................... 60 Backup ......................................39 Backup Clear .............................39 Base Note .................................43 Battery .......................................14 Battery Type ........................15, 61 BGM (Background Music) .........56 Fast Forward ............................. 29 Fast Reverse ............................. 29 File Control Display ................... 63 Fill ............................................. 50 Filter .................................... 46, 59 Fine Tuning ............................... 41 Flash Clear ............................... 39 Footswitch ............................17, 49 Formatting ................................. 64 Function .................................... 58 H Harmony ................................... 23 Harmony Type ........................... 60 Headphones ............................. 16 Chord Dictionary .......................55 Chord Type ................................54 Chorus ................................46, 59 Chorus Type ..............................40 Computer ..................................36 Computer-related Operations .... 11 Connection ................................36 Cutoff ...................................46, 59 D Data List .................................... 11 Del SMF ....................................68 Del USR ....................................68 Demo Song ...............................28 Display ......................................19 DSP ..................................... 47, 48 DSP Part ...................................48 DSP Type ..................................48 Dual Voice ...........................21, 45 Octave ...................................... 59 One Touch Setting (OTS) ......... 41 Output ....................................... 38 P Pan ........................................... 59 Pattern ................................. 27, 50 Pattern Retrigger ................. 47, 52 Pause ....................................... 29 Pedal ................................... 17, 49 Pitch ......................................... 41 Pitch Bend Range .................... 58 Power ........................................ 16 R I C O Initial Send ................................ 60 Initialization ............................... 39 Intro ........................................... 50 iPhone/iPad ............................... 37 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual .............................................. 11 K Keyboard Out ............................ 60 Keyboard Stand ........................ 17 Knob ................................... 25, 46 L Language .................................. 61 Lesson ................................ 30, 61 Load STY .................................. 67 Load USR ................................. 65 Local Control ............................. 60 M Main .......................................... 50 Main Voice ................................ 20 Master Volume .......................... 16 Melody Suppressor ..............37, 59 Melody Voice ............................ 57 Random .................................... 56 Recording ................................. 32 Registration Memory ................ 35 Release .............................. 46, 59 Repeat ................................ 29, 31 Resonance ......................... 46, 59 Retrigger Rate .......................... 47 Reverb ................................ 46, 59 Reverb Type .............................. 40 S Save SMF ................................. 65 Save USR ................................. 64 Scale ........................................ 43 Section ............................... 50, 52 Song ................................... 28, 56 Song Book .................................11 Song Out .................................. 60 Speaker .............................. 16, 38 Specifications ........................... 71 Split Point ................................. 53 Split Voice ........................... 21, 45 Stop Accompaniment ............... 53 Style ................................... 26, 50 Style Out ................................... 60 Sustain ..................................... 17 Synchro Stop ............................ 51 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 73 Appendix B F Message List ............................ 69 Metronome ............................... 22 MIDI .......................................... 60 MIDI Basics ...............................11 MIDI Reference ..........................11 Music Database ........................ 26 Music Rest ................................ 10 Index T Tap Start ..............................52, 57 Tempo ...........................22, 52, 57 Time Signature ..........................22 Touch Response .......................42 Track ..............................29, 32, 51 Transpose ..................................41 Troubleshooting .........................70 Tuning ........................................44 U USB Flash Drive ........................62 USB TO DEVICE ......................62 USB TO HOST ..........................36 V Voice ...................................20, 45 Volume ......................................16 Volume (AUX IN) .......................58 Volume (Harmony) ....................60 Volume (Metronome) .................22 Volume (Pattern) .......................53 Volume (Song) ..........................57 Volume (Style) ...........................53 Volume (USB TO HOST) ...........58 Volume (Voice) ..........................59 Volume Balance ........................46 Y Your Tempo ...............................61 Appendix 74 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual MEMO PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 75 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko (battery) laitetta verkosta. (standby) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en_01) 76 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. © 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 77 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. MALTA NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900 Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A. AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza, Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela Tel: +58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: +39-02-93577-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 FINLAND Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen, Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 CYPRUS Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 ITALY SWEDEN VENEZUELA BULGARIA Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 ICELAND Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 AFRICA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com DMI14 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan (For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2016 Yamaha Corporation Published 03/2016 POAP-A0 Printed in China ZT18040
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80

Yamaha PSR-EW400 Handleiding

Categorie
Muziekinstrumenten
Type
Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor